Document character escape sequences
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset MMIX
442
443 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NIOSII
450
451 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454 @end ifset
455 @ifset NDS32
456
457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465 [@b{-mb2bb}]
466 @end ifset
467 @ifset PDP11
468
469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PJ
475
476 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478 @end ifset
479 @ifset PPC
480
481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset RL78
497
498 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
499 [@b{-mg10}]
500 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset RX
503
504 @emph{Target RX options:}
505 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
506 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
507 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
508 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
509 [@b{-mpid}]
510 [@b{-mrelax}]
511 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
512 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset RISCV
515
516 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
517 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
518 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
519 @end ifset
520 @ifset S390
521
522 @emph{Target s390 options:}
523 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
524 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
525 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
526 @end ifset
527 @ifset SCORE
528
529 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
530 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
531 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
532 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
533 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
534 @end ifset
535 @ifset SPARC
536
537 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
538 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
539 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
540 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
541 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
542 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
543 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
544 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
545 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
546 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
547 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
548 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
549 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
550 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
551 @b{-bump}]
552 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
553 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
554 @end ifset
555 @ifset TIC54X
556
557 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
558 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
559 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset TIC6X
562
563 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
564 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
565 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
566 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
567 @end ifset
568 @ifset TILEGX
569
570 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
571 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
572 @end ifset
573 @ifset TILEPRO
574 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576 @ifset VISIUM
577
578 @emph{Target Visium options:}
579 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
580 @end ifset
581 @ifset XTENSA
582
583 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
584 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
585 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
586 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
587 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
588 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
589 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
590 @end ifset
591 @ifset Z80
592
593 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
594 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
595 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
596 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
597 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
598 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
599 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
600 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
601 @end ifset
602 @ifset Z8000
603
604 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
605 @end ifset
606
607 @c man end
608 @end smallexample
609
610 @c man begin OPTIONS
611
612 @table @gcctabopt
613 @include at-file.texi
614
615 @item -a[cdghlmns]
616 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
617
618 @table @gcctabopt
619 @item -ac
620 omit false conditionals
621
622 @item -ad
623 omit debugging directives
624
625 @item -ag
626 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
627
628 @item -ah
629 include high-level source
630
631 @item -al
632 include assembly
633
634 @item -am
635 include macro expansions
636
637 @item -an
638 omit forms processing
639
640 @item -as
641 include symbols
642
643 @item =file
644 set the name of the listing file
645 @end table
646
647 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
648 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
649 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
650
651 @item --alternate
652 Begin in alternate macro mode.
653 @ifclear man
654 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
655 @end ifclear
656
657 @item --compress-debug-sections
658 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
659 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
660 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
661 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
662
663 @ifset ELF
664 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
665 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
666 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
667 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
668 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
669 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
670 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
671 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
672 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
673 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
674 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
675 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
676 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
677 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
678 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
679
680 @end ifset
681
682 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
683 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
684 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
685 override this.
686
687 @item -D
688 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
689 other assemblers.
690
691 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
692 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
693 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
694
695 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
696 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
697 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
698 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
699 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
700 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
701
702 @item -f
703 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
704 compiler output).
705
706 @item -g
707 @itemx --gen-debug
708 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
709 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
710 ECOFF or DWARF2.
711
712 @item --gstabs
713 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
714 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
715
716 @item --gstabs+
717 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
718 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
719 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
720 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
721 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
722
723 @item --gdwarf-2
724 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
725 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
726 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
727
728 @item --gdwarf-sections
729 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
730 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
731 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
732 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
733 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
734 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
735 suffix.
736
737 @ifset ELF
738 @item --size-check=error
739 @itemx --size-check=warning
740 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
741
742 @item --elf-stt-common=no
743 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
744 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
745 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
746 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
747 @end ifset
748
749 @item --help
750 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
751
752 @item --target-help
753 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
754
755 @item -I @var{dir}
756 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
757
758 @item -J
759 Don't warn about signed overflow.
760
761 @item -K
762 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
763 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
764 @end ifclear
765 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
766 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
767 @end ifset
768
769 @item -L
770 @itemx --keep-locals
771 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
772 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
773 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
774 @ifclear man
775 @xref{Symbol Names}.
776 @end ifclear
777
778 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
779 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
780 listing to @var{number}.
781
782 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
783 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
784 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
785
786 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
787 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
788 @var{number} bytes.
789
790 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
791 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
792 to @var{number} + 1.
793
794 @item --no-pad-sections
795 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
796 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
797 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
798
799 @item -o @var{objfile}
800 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
801
802 @item -R
803 Fold the data section into the text section.
804
805 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
806 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
807 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
808 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
809 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
810 requirements at the expense of speed.
811
812 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
813 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
814 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
815 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
816
817 @ifset ELF
818 @item --sectname-subst
819 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
820 @ifclear man
821 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
822 @end ifclear
823 @end ifset
824
825 @item --statistics
826 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
827 assembly.
828
829 @item --strip-local-absolute
830 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
831
832 @item -v
833 @itemx -version
834 Print the @command{as} version.
835
836 @item --version
837 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
838
839 @item -W
840 @itemx --no-warn
841 Suppress warning messages.
842
843 @item --fatal-warnings
844 Treat warnings as errors.
845
846 @item --warn
847 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
848
849 @item -w
850 Ignored.
851
852 @item -x
853 Ignored.
854
855 @item -Z
856 Generate an object file even after errors.
857
858 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
859 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
860
861 @end table
862 @c man end
863
864 @ifset AARCH64
865
866 @ifclear man
867 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
868 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
869 @end ifclear
870
871 @ifset man
872 @c man begin OPTIONS
873 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
874 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
875 @c man end
876 @c man begin INCLUDE
877 @include c-aarch64.texi
878 @c ended inside the included file
879 @end ifset
880
881 @end ifset
882
883 @ifset ALPHA
884
885 @ifclear man
886 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
887 for an Alpha processor.
888 @end ifclear
889
890 @ifset man
891 @c man begin OPTIONS
892 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
893 processor.
894 @c man end
895 @c man begin INCLUDE
896 @include c-alpha.texi
897 @c ended inside the included file
898 @end ifset
899
900 @end ifset
901
902 @c man begin OPTIONS
903 @ifset ARC
904 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
905 processor.
906
907 @table @gcctabopt
908 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
909 This option selects the core processor variant.
910 @item -EB | -EL
911 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
912 @item -mcode-density
913 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
914 @end table
915 @end ifset
916
917 @ifset ARM
918 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
919 processor family.
920
921 @table @gcctabopt
922 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
923 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
924 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
925 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
926 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
927 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
928 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
929 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
930 @item -mthumb
931 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
932 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
933 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
934 @item -EB | -EL
935 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
936 @item -mthumb-interwork
937 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
938 ARM code in mind.
939 @item -mccs
940 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
941 @item -k
942 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
943 @end table
944 @end ifset
945 @c man end
946
947 @ifset Blackfin
948
949 @ifclear man
950 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
951 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
952 @end ifclear
953
954 @ifset man
955 @c man begin OPTIONS
956 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
957 the Blackfin processor family.
958 @c man end
959 @c man begin INCLUDE
960 @include c-bfin.texi
961 @c ended inside the included file
962 @end ifset
963
964 @end ifset
965
966 @c man begin OPTIONS
967 @ifset CRIS
968 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
969 @end ifset
970
971 @ifset D10V
972 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
973 a D10V processor.
974 @table @gcctabopt
975 @cindex D10V optimization
976 @cindex optimization, D10V
977 @item -O
978 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
979 @end table
980 @end ifset
981
982 @ifset D30V
983 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
984 processor.
985 @table @gcctabopt
986 @cindex D30V optimization
987 @cindex optimization, D30V
988 @item -O
989 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
990
991 @cindex D30V nops
992 @item -n
993 Warn when nops are generated.
994
995 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
996 @item -N
997 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
998 @end table
999 @end ifset
1000 @c man end
1001
1002 @ifset EPIPHANY
1003 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1004 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1005
1006 @ifclear man
1007 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1008 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1009 @end ifclear
1010
1011 @ifset man
1012 @c man begin OPTIONS
1013 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1014 an Epiphany processor.
1015 @c man end
1016 @c man begin INCLUDE
1017 @include c-epiphany.texi
1018 @c ended inside the included file
1019 @end ifset
1020
1021 @end ifset
1022
1023 @ifset H8300
1024
1025 @ifclear man
1026 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1027 for an H8/300 processor.
1028 @end ifclear
1029
1030 @ifset man
1031 @c man begin OPTIONS
1032 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1033 processor.
1034 @c man end
1035 @c man begin INCLUDE
1036 @include c-h8300.texi
1037 @c ended inside the included file
1038 @end ifset
1039
1040 @end ifset
1041
1042 @ifset I80386
1043
1044 @ifclear man
1045 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1046 configured for an i386 processor.
1047 @end ifclear
1048
1049 @ifset man
1050 @c man begin OPTIONS
1051 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1052 an i386 processor.
1053 @c man end
1054 @c man begin INCLUDE
1055 @include c-i386.texi
1056 @c ended inside the included file
1057 @end ifset
1058
1059 @end ifset
1060
1061 @c man begin OPTIONS
1062 @ifset I960
1063 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1064 Intel 80960 processor.
1065
1066 @table @gcctabopt
1067 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1068 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1069
1070 @item -b
1071 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1072
1073 @item -no-relax
1074 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1075 error if necessary.
1076
1077 @end table
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @ifset IP2K
1081 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1082 Ubicom IP2K series.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085
1086 @item -mip2022ext
1087 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1088
1089 @item -mip2022
1090 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1091 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1092
1093 @end table
1094 @end ifset
1095
1096 @ifset M32C
1097 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1098 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1099
1100 @table @gcctabopt
1101
1102 @item -m32c
1103 Assemble M32C instructions.
1104
1105 @item -m16c
1106 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1107
1108 @item -relax
1109 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1110
1111 @item -h-tick-hex
1112 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1113
1114 @end table
1115 @end ifset
1116
1117 @ifset M32R
1118 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1119 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1120
1121 @table @gcctabopt
1122
1123 @item --m32rx
1124 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1125 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1126
1127 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1128 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1129 encountered.
1130
1131 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1132 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1133 encountered.
1134
1135 @end table
1136 @end ifset
1137
1138 @ifset M680X0
1139 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1140 Motorola 68000 series.
1141
1142 @table @gcctabopt
1143
1144 @item -l
1145 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1146
1147 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1148 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1149 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1150 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1151 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1152
1153 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1154 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1155 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1156 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1157 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1158 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1159
1160 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1161 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1162 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1163
1164 @end table
1165 @end ifset
1166
1167 @ifset NIOSII
1168
1169 @ifclear man
1170 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1171 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1172 @end ifclear
1173
1174 @ifset man
1175 @c man begin OPTIONS
1176 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1177 Altera Nios II processor.
1178 @c man end
1179 @c man begin INCLUDE
1180 @include c-nios2.texi
1181 @c ended inside the included file
1182 @end ifset
1183 @end ifset
1184
1185 @ifset PDP11
1186
1187 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1188 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1189
1190 @table @gcctabopt
1191 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1192 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1193 default is @option{-mpic}.
1194
1195 @item -mall
1196 @itemx -mall-extensions
1197 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1198
1199 @item -mno-extensions
1200 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1201
1202 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1203 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1204
1205 @item -m@var{cpu}
1206 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1207 disable all other extensions.
1208
1209 @item -m@var{machine}
1210 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1211 model, and disable all other extensions.
1212 @end table
1213
1214 @end ifset
1215
1216 @ifset PJ
1217 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1218 a picoJava processor.
1219
1220 @table @gcctabopt
1221
1222 @cindex PJ endianness
1223 @cindex endianness, PJ
1224 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1225 @item -mb
1226 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1227
1228 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1229 @item -ml
1230 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1231
1232 @end table
1233 @end ifset
1234
1235 @ifset M68HC11
1236 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1237 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1238
1239 @table @gcctabopt
1240
1241 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1242 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1243 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1244
1245 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1246 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1247 XGATE address space.
1248
1249 @item -mshort
1250 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1251
1252 @item -mlong
1253 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1254
1255 @item -mshort-double
1256 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1257
1258 @item -mlong-double
1259 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1260
1261 @item --force-long-branches
1262 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1263 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1264 sub routine.
1265
1266 @item -S | --short-branches
1267 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1268 when the offset is out of range.
1269
1270 @item --strict-direct-mode
1271 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1272 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1273
1274 @item --print-insn-syntax
1275 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1276
1277 @item --print-opcodes
1278 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1279
1280 @item --generate-example
1281 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1282 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1283
1284 @end table
1285 @end ifset
1286
1287 @ifset SPARC
1288 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1289 for the SPARC architecture:
1290
1291 @table @gcctabopt
1292 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1293 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1294 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1295
1296 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1297 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1298
1299 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1300 UltraSPARC extensions.
1301
1302 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1303 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1304 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1305
1306 @item -bump
1307 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1308 @end table
1309 @end ifset
1310
1311 @ifset TIC54X
1312 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1313 architecture.
1314
1315 @table @gcctabopt
1316 @item -mfar-mode
1317 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1318 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1319 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1320 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1321 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1322 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1323 behaviour in the shell.
1324 @end table
1325 @end ifset
1326
1327 @ifset MIPS
1328 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1329 a MIPS processor.
1330
1331 @table @gcctabopt
1332 @item -G @var{num}
1333 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1334 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1335 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1336
1337 @cindex MIPS endianness
1338 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1339 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1340 @item -EB
1341 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1342
1343 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1344 @item -EL
1345 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1346
1347 @cindex MIPS ISA
1348 @item -mips1
1349 @itemx -mips2
1350 @itemx -mips3
1351 @itemx -mips4
1352 @itemx -mips5
1353 @itemx -mips32
1354 @itemx -mips32r2
1355 @itemx -mips32r3
1356 @itemx -mips32r5
1357 @itemx -mips32r6
1358 @itemx -mips64
1359 @itemx -mips64r2
1360 @itemx -mips64r3
1361 @itemx -mips64r5
1362 @itemx -mips64r6
1363 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1364 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1365 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1366 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1367 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1368 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1369 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1370 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1371 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1372 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1373
1374 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1375 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1376
1377 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1378 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1379
1380 @item -mfix7000
1381 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1382 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1383 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1384
1385 @item -mfix-rm7000
1386 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1387 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1388 followed by a load instruction.
1389
1390 @item -mdebug
1391 @itemx -no-mdebug
1392 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1393 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1394
1395 @item -mpdr
1396 @itemx -mno-pdr
1397 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1398
1399 @item -mgp32
1400 @itemx -mfp32
1401 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1402 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1403 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1404 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1405
1406 @item -mgp64
1407 @itemx -mfp64
1408 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1409 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1410 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1411 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1412
1413 @item -mfpxx
1414 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1415 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1416 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1417 32 or 64 bits wide.
1418
1419 @item -modd-spreg
1420 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1421 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1422 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1423 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1424
1425 @item -mips16
1426 @itemx -no-mips16
1427 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1428 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1429 turns off this option.
1430
1431 @item -mmicromips
1432 @itemx -mno-micromips
1433 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1434 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1435 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1436 at the start of the assembly file.
1437
1438 @item -msmartmips
1439 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1440 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1441 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1442 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1443
1444 @item -mips3d
1445 @itemx -no-mips3d
1446 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1447 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1448 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1449
1450 @item -mdmx
1451 @itemx -no-mdmx
1452 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1453 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1454 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1455
1456 @item -mdsp
1457 @itemx -mno-dsp
1458 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1459 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1460 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1461
1462 @item -mdspr2
1463 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1464 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1465 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1466 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1467 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1468
1469 @item -mdspr3
1470 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1471 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1472 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1473 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1474 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1475
1476 @item -mmsa
1477 @itemx -mno-msa
1478 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1479 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1480 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1481
1482 @item -mxpa
1483 @itemx -mno-xpa
1484 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1485 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1486 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1487
1488 @item -mmt
1489 @itemx -mno-mt
1490 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1491 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1492 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1493
1494 @item -mmcu
1495 @itemx -mno-mcu
1496 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1497 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1498 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1499
1500 @item -minsn32
1501 @itemx -mno-insn32
1502 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1503 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1504 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1505 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1506 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1507 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1508 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1509
1510 @item --construct-floats
1511 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1512 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1513 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1514 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1515 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1516 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1517
1518 @item --relax-branch
1519 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1520 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1521 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1522 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1523
1524 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1525 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1526 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1527
1528 @cindex emulation
1529 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1530 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1531 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1532 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1533 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1534
1535 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1536 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1537 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1538 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1539 preferred options instead.
1540
1541 @item -nocpp
1542 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1543 the native tools.
1544
1545 @item --trap
1546 @itemx --no-trap
1547 @itemx --break
1548 @itemx --no-break
1549 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1550 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1551 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1552 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1553 break exception.
1554
1555 @item -n
1556 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1557 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1558 @end table
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @ifset MCORE
1562 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1563 an MCore processor.
1564
1565 @table @gcctabopt
1566 @item -jsri2bsr
1567 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1568 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1569 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1570
1571 @item -sifilter
1572 @itemx -nosifilter
1573 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1574 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1575
1576 @item -relax
1577 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1578
1579 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1580 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1581 can be assembled.
1582
1583 @item -EB
1584 Assemble for a big endian target.
1585
1586 @item -EL
1587 Assemble for a little endian target.
1588
1589 @end table
1590 @end ifset
1591 @c man end
1592
1593 @ifset METAG
1594
1595 @ifclear man
1596 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1597 for a Meta processor.
1598 @end ifclear
1599
1600 @ifset man
1601 @c man begin OPTIONS
1602 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1603 Meta processor.
1604 @c man end
1605 @c man begin INCLUDE
1606 @include c-metag.texi
1607 @c ended inside the included file
1608 @end ifset
1609
1610 @end ifset
1611
1612 @c man begin OPTIONS
1613 @ifset MMIX
1614 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1615 @end ifset
1616
1617 @ifset NDS32
1618
1619 @ifclear man
1620 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1621 for a NDS32 processor.
1622 @end ifclear
1623 @c ended inside the included file
1624 @end ifset
1625
1626 @ifset man
1627 @c man begin OPTIONS
1628 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1629 NDS32 processor.
1630 @c man end
1631 @c man begin INCLUDE
1632 @include c-nds32.texi
1633 @c ended inside the included file
1634 @end ifset
1635
1636 @c man end
1637 @ifset PPC
1638
1639 @ifclear man
1640 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1641 for a PowerPC processor.
1642 @end ifclear
1643
1644 @ifset man
1645 @c man begin OPTIONS
1646 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1647 PowerPC processor.
1648 @c man end
1649 @c man begin INCLUDE
1650 @include c-ppc.texi
1651 @c ended inside the included file
1652 @end ifset
1653
1654 @end ifset
1655
1656 @ifset RISCV
1657
1658 @ifclear man
1659 @xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1660 for a RISC-V processor.
1661 @end ifclear
1662
1663 @ifset man
1664 @c man begin OPTIONS
1665 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1666 RISC-V processor.
1667 @c man end
1668 @c man begin INCLUDE
1669 @include c-riscv.texi
1670 @c ended inside the included file
1671 @end ifset
1672
1673 @end ifset
1674
1675 @c man begin OPTIONS
1676 @ifset RX
1677 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1678 @end ifset
1679
1680 @ifset S390
1681 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1682 processor family.
1683
1684 @table @gcctabopt
1685 @item -m31
1686 @itemx -m64
1687 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1688 @item -mesa
1689 @item -mzarch
1690 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1691 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1692 @item -march=@var{processor}
1693 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1694 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1695 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1696 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1697 or @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}).
1698 @item -mregnames
1699 @itemx -mno-regnames
1700 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1701 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1702 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1703 but evaluates to zero.
1704 @end table
1705 @end ifset
1706 @c man end
1707
1708 @ifset TIC6X
1709
1710 @ifclear man
1711 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1712 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1713 @end ifclear
1714
1715 @ifset man
1716 @c man begin OPTIONS
1717 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1718 TMS320C6000 processor.
1719 @c man end
1720 @c man begin INCLUDE
1721 @include c-tic6x.texi
1722 @c ended inside the included file
1723 @end ifset
1724
1725 @end ifset
1726
1727 @ifset TILEGX
1728
1729 @ifclear man
1730 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1731 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1732 @end ifclear
1733
1734 @ifset man
1735 @c man begin OPTIONS
1736 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1737 processor.
1738 @c man end
1739 @c man begin INCLUDE
1740 @include c-tilegx.texi
1741 @c ended inside the included file
1742 @end ifset
1743
1744 @end ifset
1745
1746 @ifset VISIUM
1747
1748 @ifclear man
1749 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1750 for a Visium processor.
1751 @end ifclear
1752
1753 @ifset man
1754 @c man begin OPTIONS
1755 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1756 processor.
1757 @c man end
1758 @c man begin INCLUDE
1759 @include c-visium.texi
1760 @c ended inside the included file
1761 @end ifset
1762
1763 @end ifset
1764
1765 @ifset XTENSA
1766
1767 @ifclear man
1768 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1769 for an Xtensa processor.
1770 @end ifclear
1771
1772 @ifset man
1773 @c man begin OPTIONS
1774 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1775 Xtensa processor.
1776 @c man end
1777 @c man begin INCLUDE
1778 @include c-xtensa.texi
1779 @c ended inside the included file
1780 @end ifset
1781
1782 @end ifset
1783
1784 @c man begin OPTIONS
1785
1786 @ifset Z80
1787 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1788 a Z80 family processor.
1789 @table @gcctabopt
1790 @item -z80
1791 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1792 @item -r800
1793 Assemble for R800 processor.
1794 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1795 @itemx -Wnud
1796 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1797 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1798 @itemx -Wnup
1799 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1800 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1801 @itemx -Wud
1802 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1803 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1804 @itemx -Wup
1805 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1806 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1807 @itemx -Fud
1808 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1809 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1810 @itemx -Fup
1811 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1812 @end table
1813 @end ifset
1814
1815 @c man end
1816
1817 @menu
1818 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1819 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1820 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1821 * Command Line:: Command Line
1822 * Input Files:: Input Files
1823 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1824 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1825 @end menu
1826
1827 @node Manual
1828 @section Structure of this Manual
1829
1830 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1831 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1832 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1833 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1834 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1835
1836 @ifclear GENERIC
1837 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1838 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1839 @end ifclear
1840 @ifset GENERIC
1841 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1842 various flavors of the assembler.
1843 @end ifset
1844
1845 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1846 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1847 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1848 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1849 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1850 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1851 particular architecture.
1852 @ifset GENERIC
1853 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1854 machine architecture manual for this information.
1855 @end ifset
1856 @ifclear GENERIC
1857 @ifset H8/300
1858 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1859 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1860 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1861 @end ifset
1862 @ifset SH
1863 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1864 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1865 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1866 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1867 @end ifset
1868 @ifset Z8000
1869 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1870 @end ifset
1871 @end ifclear
1872
1873 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1874 @ignore
1875 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1876 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1877 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1878 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1879 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1880 qualification.
1881
1882 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1883 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1884 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1885 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1886 @end ignore
1887
1888 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1889 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1890 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1891 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1892 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1893 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1894 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1895 @c directives).
1896
1897 @node GNU Assembler
1898 @section The GNU Assembler
1899
1900 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1901
1902 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1903 @ifclear GENERIC
1904 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1905 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1906 @end ifclear
1907 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1908 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1909 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1910 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1911 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1912
1913 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1914 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1915 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1916 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1917 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1918 machine would assemble.
1919 @ifset VAX
1920 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1921 @end ifset
1922 @ifset M680X0
1923 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1924 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1925 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1926 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1927 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1928 @end ifset
1929
1930 @c man end
1931
1932 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1933 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1934 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1935
1936 @node Object Formats
1937 @section Object File Formats
1938
1939 @cindex object file format
1940 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1941 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1942 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1943 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1944 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1945 @ifclear GENERIC
1946 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1947 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1948 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1949 @end ifclear
1950 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1951 @ifset I960
1952 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1953 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1954 @end ifset
1955 @ifset HPPA
1956 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1957 SOM or ELF format object files.
1958 @end ifset
1959 @end ifclear
1960
1961 @node Command Line
1962 @section Command Line
1963
1964 @cindex command line conventions
1965
1966 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1967 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1968 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1969 significant.
1970
1971 @cindex standard input, as input file
1972 @kindex --
1973 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1974 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1975
1976 @cindex options, command line
1977 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1978 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1979 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1980 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1981 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1982
1983 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1984 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1985 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1986 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1987
1988 @smallexample
1989 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1990 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1991 @end smallexample
1992
1993 @node Input Files
1994 @section Input Files
1995
1996 @cindex input
1997 @cindex source program
1998 @cindex files, input
1999 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2000 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2001 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2002 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2003
2004 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2005 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2006 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2007 order specified.
2008
2009 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2010 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2011 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2012 (The standard input is also a file.)
2013
2014 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2015 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2016 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2017 is taken to be an input file name.
2018
2019 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2020 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2021 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2022 to assemble.
2023
2024 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2025 in your command line.
2026
2027 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2028 file.
2029
2030 @c man end
2031
2032 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2033
2034 @cindex input file linenumbers
2035 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2036 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2037 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2038 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2039 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2040
2041 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2042 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2043
2044 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2045 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2046 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2047 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2048 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2049 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2050
2051 @node Object
2052 @section Output (Object) File
2053
2054 @cindex object file
2055 @cindex output file
2056 @kindex a.out
2057 @kindex .o
2058 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2059 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2060 is the object file. Its default name is
2061 @ifclear BOUT
2062 @code{a.out}.
2063 @end ifclear
2064 @ifset BOUT
2065 @ifset GENERIC
2066 @code{a.out}, or
2067 @end ifset
2068 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2069 @end ifset
2070 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2071 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2072 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2073 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2074 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2075
2076 @cindex linker
2077 @kindex ld
2078 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2079 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2080 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2081 information for the debugger.
2082
2083 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2084 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2085
2086 @node Errors
2087 @section Error and Warning Messages
2088
2089 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2090
2091 @cindex error messages
2092 @cindex warning messages
2093 @cindex messages from assembler
2094 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2095 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2096 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2097 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2098 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2099
2100 @c man end
2101
2102 @cindex format of warning messages
2103 Warning messages have the format
2104
2105 @smallexample
2106 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2107 @end smallexample
2108
2109 @noindent
2110 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2111 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2112 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2113 @ifset GENERIC
2114 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2115 @end ifset
2116 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2117 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2118 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2119
2120 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2121 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2122
2123 @smallexample
2124 .file 2 "bar.c"
2125 error_assembler_source
2126 .file "foo.c"
2127 .line 30
2128 error_c_source
2129 @end smallexample
2130
2131 produces this output:
2132
2133 @smallexample
2134 Assembler messages:
2135 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2136 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @cindex format of error messages
2140 Error messages have the format
2141
2142 @smallexample
2143 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2144 @end smallexample
2145
2146 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2147 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2148 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2149
2150 @node Invoking
2151 @chapter Command-Line Options
2152
2153 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2154 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2155 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2156 for options specific
2157 @ifclear GENERIC
2158 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2159 @end ifclear
2160 @ifset GENERIC
2161 to particular machine architectures.
2162 @end ifset
2163
2164 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2165
2166 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2167 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2168 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2169 by commas. For example:
2170
2171 @smallexample
2172 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2173 @end smallexample
2174
2175 @noindent
2176 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2177 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2178 local symbols in the symbol table).
2179
2180 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2181 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2182 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2183 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2184 assembler.)
2185
2186 @c man end
2187
2188 @menu
2189 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2190 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2191 * D:: -D for compatibility
2192 * f:: -f to work faster
2193 * I:: -I for .include search path
2194 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2195 * K:: -K for compatibility
2196 @end ifclear
2197 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2198 * K:: -K for difference tables
2199 @end ifset
2200
2201 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2202 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2203 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2204 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2205 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2206 * o:: -o to name the object file
2207 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2208 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2209 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2210 * v:: -v to announce version
2211 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2212 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2213 @end menu
2214
2215 @node a
2216 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2217
2218 @kindex -a
2219 @kindex -ac
2220 @kindex -ad
2221 @kindex -ag
2222 @kindex -ah
2223 @kindex -al
2224 @kindex -an
2225 @kindex -as
2226 @cindex listings, enabling
2227 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2228
2229 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2230 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2231 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2232 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2233 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2234 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2235 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2236 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2237 also.
2238
2239 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2240 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2241
2242 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2243 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2244 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2245 omitted from the listing.
2246
2247 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2248 listing.
2249
2250 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2251 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2252 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2253 @code{.sbttl}.
2254 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2255 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2256 listing-control directives have no effect.
2257
2258 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2259 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2260
2261 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2262 because it
2263 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2264 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2265 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2266 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2267 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2268
2269 @node alternate
2270 @section @option{--alternate}
2271
2272 @kindex --alternate
2273 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2274
2275 @node D
2276 @section @option{-D}
2277
2278 @kindex -D
2279 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2280 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2281 @command{@value{AS}}.
2282
2283 @node f
2284 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2285
2286 @kindex -f
2287 @cindex trusted compiler
2288 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2289 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2290 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2291 and comment preprocessing on
2292 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2293 ,Preprocessing}.
2294
2295 @quotation
2296 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2297 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2298 not work correctly.
2299 @end quotation
2300
2301 @node I
2302 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2303
2304 @kindex -I @var{path}
2305 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2306 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2307 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2308 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2309 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2310 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2311 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2312 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2313 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2314 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2315
2316 @node K
2317 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2318
2319 @kindex -K
2320 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2321 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2322 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2323 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2324 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2325 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2326 alteration on other platforms.
2327 @end ifclear
2328
2329 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2330 @cindex difference tables, warning
2331 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2332 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2333 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2334 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2335 is done.
2336 @end ifset
2337
2338 @node L
2339 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2340
2341 @kindex -L
2342 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2343 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2344 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2345 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2346 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2347 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2348 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2349 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2350
2351 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2352 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2353 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2354
2355 @node listing
2356 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2357
2358 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2359 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2360 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2361 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2362 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2363 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2364 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2365 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2366
2367 @table @gcctabopt
2368 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2369 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2370 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2371 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2372 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2373
2374 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2375 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2376 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2377 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2378 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2379 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2380 switch is used the default is to one.
2381
2382 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2383 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2384 @cindex Width of source line output
2385 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2386 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2387 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2388
2389 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2390 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2391 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2392 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2393 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2394 @end table
2395
2396 @node M
2397 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2398
2399 @kindex -M
2400 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2401 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2402 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2403 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2404 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2405 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2406 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2407 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2408 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2409
2410 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2411 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2412 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2413 individually. These are:
2414
2415 @itemize @bullet
2416 @item global symbols in common section
2417
2418 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2419 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2420 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2421 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2422 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2423
2424 @item complex relocations
2425
2426 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2427 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2428 are not support by other object file formats.
2429
2430 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2431
2432 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2433 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2434 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2435 script.
2436
2437 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2438
2439 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2440 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2441
2442 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2443
2444 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2445 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2446 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2447 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2448 assigned within a linker script.
2449 @end itemize
2450
2451 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2452 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2453 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2454
2455 @itemize @bullet
2456
2457 @item EBCDIC strings
2458
2459 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2460
2461 @item packed binary coded decimal
2462
2463 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2464 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2465
2466 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2467
2468 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2469
2470 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2471
2472 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2473
2474 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2475
2476 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2477 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2478 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2479 these options serve no purpose.
2480
2481 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2482
2483 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2484 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2485 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2486
2487 @item other @code{OPT} options
2488
2489 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2490 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2491
2492 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2493
2494 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2495 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2496
2497 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2498
2499 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2500
2501 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2502
2503 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2504
2505 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2506
2507 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2508
2509 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2510
2511 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2512
2513 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2514
2515 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2516
2517 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2518
2519 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2520
2521 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2522
2523 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2524
2525 @end itemize
2526
2527 @node MD
2528 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2529
2530 @kindex --MD
2531 @cindex dependency tracking
2532 @cindex make rules
2533
2534 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2535 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2536 dependencies of the main source file.
2537
2538 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2539
2540 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2541
2542 @node no-pad-sections
2543 @section Output Section Padding
2544 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2545 @cindex output section padding
2546 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2547 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2548 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2549 disable this behaviour.
2550
2551 @node o
2552 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2553
2554 @kindex -o
2555 @cindex naming object file
2556 @cindex object file name
2557 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2558 default it has the name
2559 @ifset GENERIC
2560 @ifset I960
2561 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2562 @end ifset
2563 @ifclear I960
2564 @file{a.out}.
2565 @end ifclear
2566 @end ifset
2567 @ifclear GENERIC
2568 @ifset I960
2569 @file{b.out}.
2570 @end ifset
2571 @ifclear I960
2572 @file{a.out}.
2573 @end ifclear
2574 @end ifclear
2575 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2576 object file a different name.
2577
2578 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2579 existing file of the same name.
2580
2581 @node R
2582 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2583
2584 @kindex -R
2585 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2586 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2587 @cindex joining text and data sections
2588 @cindex merging text and data sections
2589 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2590 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2591 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2592 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2593 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2594 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2595
2596 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2597 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2598 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2599 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2600
2601 @ifset COFF-ELF
2602 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2603 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2604 @samp{.data}.
2605 @end ifset
2606
2607 @ifset HPPA
2608 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2609 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2610 @end ifset
2611
2612 @node statistics
2613 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2614
2615 @kindex --statistics
2616 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2617 @cindex time, total for assembly
2618 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2619 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2620 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2621 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2622 seconds).
2623
2624 @node traditional-format
2625 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2626
2627 @kindex --traditional-format
2628 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2629 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2630 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2631
2632 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2633 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2634
2635 @node v
2636 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2637
2638 @kindex -v
2639 @kindex -version
2640 @cindex assembler version
2641 @cindex version of assembler
2642 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2643 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2644 command line.
2645
2646 @node W
2647 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2648
2649 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2650 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2651 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2652 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2653
2654 @kindex -W
2655 @kindex --no-warn
2656 @cindex suppressing warnings
2657 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2658 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2659 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2660 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2661 are still reported.
2662
2663 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2664 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2665 @cindex warnings, causing error
2666 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2667 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2668
2669 @kindex --warn
2670 @cindex warnings, switching on
2671 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2672 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2673
2674 @node Z
2675 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2676 @cindex object file, after errors
2677 @cindex errors, continuing after
2678 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2679 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2680 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2681 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2682 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2683 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2684
2685 @node Syntax
2686 @chapter Syntax
2687
2688 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2689 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2690 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2691 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2692 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2693 @ifclear VAX
2694 assembler.
2695 @end ifclear
2696 @ifset VAX
2697 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2698 @end ifset
2699
2700 @menu
2701 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2702 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2703 * Comments:: Comments
2704 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2705 * Statements:: Statements
2706 * Constants:: Constants
2707 @end menu
2708
2709 @node Preprocessing
2710 @section Preprocessing
2711
2712 @cindex preprocessing
2713 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2714 @itemize @bullet
2715 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2716 @item
2717 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2718 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2719 a single space.
2720
2721 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2722 @item
2723 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2724 appropriate number of newlines.
2725
2726 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2727 @item
2728 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2729 @end itemize
2730
2731 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2732 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2733 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2734 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2735 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2736 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2737 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2738
2739 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2740 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2741 preprocessed.
2742
2743 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2744 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2745 @kindex #NO_APP
2746 @kindex #APP
2747 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2748 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2749 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2750 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2751 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2752 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2753 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2754 and whitespace.
2755
2756 @node Whitespace
2757 @section Whitespace
2758
2759 @cindex whitespace
2760 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2761 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2762 people to read. Unless within character constants
2763 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2764 as exactly one space.
2765
2766 @node Comments
2767 @section Comments
2768
2769 @cindex comments
2770 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2771 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2772
2773 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2774 This means you may not nest these comments.
2775
2776 @smallexample
2777 /*
2778 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2779 is to use this sort of comment.
2780 */
2781
2782 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2783 @end smallexample
2784
2785 @cindex line comment character
2786 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2787 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2788 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2789 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2790 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2791 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2792 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2793 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2794
2795 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2796 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2797 to specify logical line numbers:
2798
2799 @kindex #
2800 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2801 @cindex logical line numbers
2802 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2803 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2804 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2805 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2806 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2807
2808 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2809 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2810
2811 @smallexample
2812 # This is an ordinary comment.
2813 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2814 # This is logical line # 36.
2815 @end smallexample
2816 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2817 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2818
2819 @node Symbol Intro
2820 @section Symbols
2821
2822 @cindex characters used in symbols
2823 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2824 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2825 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2826 @samp{_.$}.
2827 @end ifclear
2828 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2829 @ifclear GENERIC
2830 @ifset H8
2831 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2832 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2833 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2834 symbol names.)
2835 @end ifset
2836 @end ifclear
2837 @end ifset
2838 @ifset GENERIC
2839 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2840 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2841 @end ifset
2842 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2843 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2844 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2845 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2846 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2847
2848 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2849 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2850 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2851 backslash @code{\} character.
2852 @cindex length of symbols
2853
2854 @node Statements
2855 @section Statements
2856
2857 @cindex statements, structure of
2858 @cindex line separator character
2859 @cindex statement separator character
2860
2861 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2862 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2863 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2864 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2865 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2866 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2867 exception: they do not end statements.
2868
2869 @cindex newline, required at file end
2870 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2871 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2872 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2873
2874 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2875
2876 @cindex instructions and directives
2877 @cindex directives and instructions
2878 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2879 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2880 @c 13feb91.
2881 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2882 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2883 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2884 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2885 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2886 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2887 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2888 @ifset GENERIC
2889 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2890 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2891 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2892 language.@refill
2893 @end ifset
2894
2895 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2896 @cindex label (@code{:})
2897 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2898 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2899 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2900
2901 @ifset HPPA
2902 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2903 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2904 only one label may be defined on each line.
2905 @end ifset
2906
2907 @smallexample
2908 label: .directive followed by something
2909 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2910 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2911 @end smallexample
2912
2913 @node Constants
2914 @section Constants
2915
2916 @cindex constants
2917 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2918 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2919 @smallexample
2920 @group
2921 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2922 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2923 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2924 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2925 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2926 @end group
2927 @end smallexample
2928
2929 @menu
2930 * Characters:: Character Constants
2931 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2932 @end menu
2933
2934 @node Characters
2935 @subsection Character Constants
2936
2937 @cindex character constants
2938 @cindex constants, character
2939 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2940 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2941 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2942 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2943 used in arithmetic expressions.
2944
2945 @menu
2946 * Strings:: Strings
2947 * Chars:: Characters
2948 @end menu
2949
2950 @node Strings
2951 @subsubsection Strings
2952
2953 @cindex string constants
2954 @cindex constants, string
2955 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2956 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2957 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2958 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2959 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2960 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2961 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2962 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2963
2964 @cindex escape codes, character
2965 @cindex character escape codes
2966 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2967 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2968 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2969 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2970 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2971 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2972 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2973 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2974 @table @kbd
2975 @c @item \a
2976 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2977 @c
2978 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2979 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2980 @item \b
2981 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2982
2983 @c @item \e
2984 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2985 @c
2986 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2987 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2988 @item backslash-f
2989 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2990
2991 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2992 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2993 @item \n
2994 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2995
2996 @c @item \p
2997 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2998 @c
2999 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3000 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3001 @item \r
3002 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3003
3004 @c @item \s
3005 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3006 @c other assemblers.
3007 @c
3008 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3009 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3010 @item \t
3011 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3012
3013 @c @item \v
3014 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3015 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3016 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3017 @c
3018 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3019 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3020 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3021 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3022 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3023 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3024
3025 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3026 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3027 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3028 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3029 lower case @code{x} works.
3030
3031 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3032 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3033 @item \\
3034 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3035
3036 @c @item \'
3037 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3038 @c This is needed in single character literals
3039 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3040 @c a @samp{'}.
3041 @c
3042 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3043 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3044 @item \"
3045 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3046 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3047
3048 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3049 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3050 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3051 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3052 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3053 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3054 code and warns you of the fact.
3055 @end table
3056
3057 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3058 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3059 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3060 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3061 sequence.
3062
3063 @node Chars
3064 @subsubsection Characters
3065
3066 @cindex single character constant
3067 @cindex character, single
3068 @cindex constant, single character
3069 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3070 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3071 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3072 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3073 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3074 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3075 accent. A newline
3076 @ifclear GENERIC
3077 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3078 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3079 @end ifclear
3080 @ifset abnormal-separator
3081 @ifset H8
3082 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3083 Renesas SH)
3084 @end ifset
3085 @end ifset
3086 @end ifclear
3087 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3088 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3089 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3090 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3091 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3092
3093 @node Numbers
3094 @subsection Number Constants
3095
3096 @cindex constants, number
3097 @cindex number constants
3098 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3099 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3100 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3101 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3102 are floating point numbers, described below.
3103
3104 @menu
3105 * Integers:: Integers
3106 * Bignums:: Bignums
3107 * Flonums:: Flonums
3108 @ifclear GENERIC
3109 @ifset I960
3110 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3111 @end ifset
3112 @end ifclear
3113 @end menu
3114
3115 @node Integers
3116 @subsubsection Integers
3117 @cindex integers
3118 @cindex constants, integer
3119
3120 @cindex binary integers
3121 @cindex integers, binary
3122 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3123 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3124
3125 @cindex octal integers
3126 @cindex integers, octal
3127 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3128 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3129
3130 @cindex decimal integers
3131 @cindex integers, decimal
3132 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3133 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3134
3135 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3136 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3137 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3138 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3139
3140 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3141 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3142 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3143
3144 @node Bignums
3145 @subsubsection Bignums
3146
3147 @cindex bignums
3148 @cindex constants, bignum
3149 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3150 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3151 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3152 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3153
3154 @node Flonums
3155 @subsubsection Flonums
3156 @cindex flonums
3157 @cindex floating point numbers
3158 @cindex constants, floating point
3159
3160 @cindex precision, floating point
3161 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3162 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3163 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3164 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3165 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3166 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3167
3168 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3169 @itemize @bullet
3170 @item
3171 The digit @samp{0}.
3172 @ifset HPPA
3173 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3174 @end ifset
3175
3176 @item
3177 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3178 @ifset GENERIC
3179 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3180 @ignore
3181 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3182 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3183 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3184 @end ignore
3185
3186 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3187 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3188 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3189
3190 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3191 (in upper or lower case).
3192
3193 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3194 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3195
3196 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3197 @end ifset
3198 @ifclear GENERIC
3199 @ifset ARC
3200 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3201 @end ifset
3202 @ifset H8
3203 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3204 @end ifset
3205 @ifset HPPA
3206 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3207 @end ifset
3208 @ifset I960
3209 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3210 @end ifset
3211 @end ifclear
3212
3213 @item
3214 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3215
3216 @item
3217 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3218
3219 @item
3220 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3221 or more decimal digits.
3222
3223 @item
3224 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3225
3226 @itemize @bullet
3227 @item
3228 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3229 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3230 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3231 @item
3232 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3233 @item
3234 One or more decimal digits.
3235 @end itemize
3236
3237 @end itemize
3238
3239 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3240 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3241
3242 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3243 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3244 @command{@value{AS}}.
3245
3246 @ifclear GENERIC
3247 @ifset I960
3248 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3249 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3250 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3251 @node Bit Fields
3252 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3253
3254 @cindex bit fields
3255 @cindex constants, bit field
3256 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3257 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3258 @example
3259 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3260 @end example
3261 @noindent
3262 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3263 @var{value}.
3264
3265 The resulting number is then packed
3266 @ifset GENERIC
3267 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3268 (in host-dependent byte order)
3269 @end ifset
3270 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3271 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3272 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3273 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3274 least significant digits.@refill
3275
3276 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3277 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3278 @end ifset
3279 @end ifclear
3280
3281 @node Sections
3282 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3283 @cindex sections
3284 @cindex relocation
3285
3286 @menu
3287 * Secs Background:: Background
3288 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3289 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3290 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3291 * bss:: bss Section
3292 @end menu
3293
3294 @node Secs Background
3295 @section Background
3296
3297 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3298 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3299 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3300
3301 @cindex linker, and assembler
3302 @cindex assembler, and linker
3303 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3304 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3305 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3306 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3307 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3308 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3309 sections.
3310
3311 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3312 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3313 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3314 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3315 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3316 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3317 the proper run-time addresses.
3318 @ifset H8
3319 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3320 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3321 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3322 @end ifset
3323
3324 @cindex standard assembler sections
3325 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3326 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3327 @dfn{bss} sections.
3328
3329 @ifset COFF-ELF
3330 @ifset GENERIC
3331 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3332 @end ifset
3333 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3334 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3335 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3336 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3337 @end ifset
3338
3339 @ifset HPPA
3340 @ifset GENERIC
3341 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3342 @end ifset
3343 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3344 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3345 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3346 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3347 assembler directives.
3348
3349 @ifset SOM
3350 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3351 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3352 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3353 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3354 @end ifset
3355 @end ifset
3356
3357 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3358 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3359
3360 @ifset HPPA
3361 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3362 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3363 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3364 @end ifset
3365
3366 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3367 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3368 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3369 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3370 file is mentioned:
3371 @itemize @bullet
3372 @item
3373 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3374 an address?
3375 @item
3376 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3377 @item
3378 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3379 @display
3380 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3381 @end display
3382 @item
3383 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3384 @end itemize
3385
3386 @cindex addresses, format of
3387 @cindex section-relative addressing
3388 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3389 @display
3390 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3391 @end display
3392 @noindent
3393 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3394 nature.
3395 @ifset SOM
3396 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3397 symbol-relative instead.)
3398 @end ifset
3399
3400 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3401 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3402
3403 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3404 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3405 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3406 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3407 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3408 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3409 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3410 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3411 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3412
3413 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3414 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3415 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3416 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3417 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3418 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3419 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3420
3421 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3422 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3423 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3424 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3425 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3426 data and bss sections.
3427
3428 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3429 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3430
3431 @node Ld Sections
3432 @section Linker Sections
3433 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3434
3435 @table @strong
3436
3437 @ifset COFF-ELF
3438 @cindex named sections
3439 @cindex sections, named
3440 @item named sections
3441 @end ifset
3442 @ifset aout-bout
3443 @cindex text section
3444 @cindex data section
3445 @itemx text section
3446 @itemx data section
3447 @end ifset
3448 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3449 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3450 true of another.
3451 @c @ifset aout-bout
3452 When the program is running, however, it is
3453 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3454 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3455 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3456 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3457 in the data section.
3458 @c @end ifset
3459
3460 @cindex bss section
3461 @item bss section
3462 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3463 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3464 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3465 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3466 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3467 those explicit zeros from object files.
3468
3469 @cindex absolute section
3470 @item absolute section
3471 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3472 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3473 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3474 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3475
3476 @cindex undefined section
3477 @item undefined section
3478 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3479 the preceding sections.
3480 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3481 @end table
3482
3483 @cindex relocation example
3484 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3485 @ifset COFF-ELF
3486 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3487 @end ifset
3488 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3489
3490 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3491 @ifnottex
3492 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3493 @smallexample
3494 +-----+----+--+
3495 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3496 +-----+----+--+
3497
3498 text data bss
3499 seg. seg. seg.
3500
3501 +---+---+---+
3502 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3503 +---+---+---+
3504
3505 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3506 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3507 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3508
3509 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3510 @end smallexample
3511 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3512 @end ifnottex
3513 @need 5000
3514 @tex
3515 \bigskip
3516 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3517 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3518 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3519
3520 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3521 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3522 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3523
3524 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3525 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3526 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3527 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3528 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3529
3530 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3531 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3532
3533 @end tex
3534 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3535
3536 @node As Sections
3537 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3538
3539 @cindex internal assembler sections
3540 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3541 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3542 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3543 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3544 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3545 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3546 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3547 section-relative address.
3548
3549 @table @b
3550 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3551 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3552 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3553 bug in the assembler.
3554
3555 @cindex expr (internal section)
3556 @item expr section
3557 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3558 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3559 it in the expr section.
3560 @c FIXME item debug
3561 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3562 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3563 @c FIXME item register
3564 @end table
3565
3566 @node Sub-Sections
3567 @section Sub-Sections
3568
3569 @cindex numbered subsections
3570 @cindex grouping data
3571 @ifset aout-bout
3572 Assembled bytes
3573 @ifset COFF-ELF
3574 conventionally
3575 @end ifset
3576 fall into two sections: text and data.
3577 @end ifset
3578 You may have separate groups of
3579 @ifset GENERIC
3580 data in named sections
3581 @end ifset
3582 @ifclear GENERIC
3583 @ifclear aout-bout
3584 data in named sections
3585 @end ifclear
3586 @ifset aout-bout
3587 text or data
3588 @end ifset
3589 @end ifclear
3590 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3591 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3592 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3593 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3594 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3595 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3596 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3597 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3598 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3599 constants being output.
3600
3601 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3602 goes in subsection number zero.
3603
3604 @ifset GENERIC
3605 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3606 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3607 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3608 @end ifset
3609 @ifclear GENERIC
3610 @ifset H8
3611 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3612 boundary (two bytes).
3613 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3614 @end ifset
3615 @ifset I960
3616 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3617 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3618 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3619 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3620 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3621 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3622 @end ifset
3623 @end ifclear
3624
3625 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3626 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3627 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3628 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3629 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3630 data subsections as a data section.
3631
3632 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3633 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3634 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3635 @ifset COFF
3636 @ifset GENERIC
3637 When generating COFF output, you
3638 @end ifset
3639 @ifclear GENERIC
3640 You
3641 @end ifclear
3642 can also use an extra subsection
3643 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3644 @var{expression}}.
3645 @end ifset
3646 @ifset ELF
3647 @ifset GENERIC
3648 When generating ELF output, you
3649 @end ifset
3650 @ifclear GENERIC
3651 You
3652 @end ifclear
3653 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3654 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3655 @end ifset
3656 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3657 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3658 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3659 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3660 @smallexample
3661 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3662 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3663 .text 1
3664 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3665 .data 0
3666 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3667 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3668 .text 0
3669 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3670 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3671 @end smallexample
3672
3673 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3674 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3675 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3676 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3677 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3678 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3679 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3680
3681 @node bss
3682 @section bss Section
3683
3684 @cindex bss section
3685 @cindex common variable storage
3686 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3687 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3688 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3689 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3690 section are zeroed bytes.
3691
3692 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3693 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3694
3695 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3696 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3697
3698 @ifset GENERIC
3699 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3700 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3701 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3702 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3703 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3704 @end ifset
3705
3706 @node Symbols
3707 @chapter Symbols
3708
3709 @cindex symbols
3710 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3711 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3712 to debug.
3713
3714 @quotation
3715 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3716 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3717 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3718 @end quotation
3719
3720 @menu
3721 * Labels:: Labels
3722 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3723 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3724 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3725 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3726 @end menu
3727
3728 @node Labels
3729 @section Labels
3730
3731 @cindex labels
3732 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3733 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3734 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3735 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3736 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3737 definitions.
3738
3739 @ifset HPPA
3740 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3741 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3742 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3743 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3744 @end ifset
3745
3746 @node Setting Symbols
3747 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3748
3749 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3750 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3751 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3752 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3753 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3754 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3755 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3756 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3757
3758 @ifset Blackfin
3759 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3760 @end ifset
3761
3762 @node Symbol Names
3763 @section Symbol Names
3764
3765 @cindex symbol names
3766 @cindex names, symbol
3767 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3768 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3769 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3770 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3771 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3772 particular target machine), and underscores.
3773 @end ifclear
3774 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3775 @ifset H8
3776 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3777 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3778 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3779 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3780 @end ifset
3781 @end ifset
3782
3783 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3784 than @code{Foo}.
3785
3786 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3787 Local Labels. See below.
3788
3789 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3790 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3791 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3792 currently supported.
3793
3794 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3795 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3796 in a program.
3797
3798 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3799
3800 @cindex local symbol names
3801 @cindex symbol names, local
3802 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3803 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3804 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3805 set of local label prefixes.
3806 @ifset HPPA
3807 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3808 @end ifset
3809
3810 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3811 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3812 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3813 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3814
3815 @subheading Local Labels
3816
3817 @cindex local labels
3818 @cindex temporary symbol names
3819 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3820 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3821 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3822 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3823 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3824 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3825 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3826 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3827 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3828 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3829
3830 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3831 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3832 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3833 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3834 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3835 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3836 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3837
3838 Here is an example:
3839
3840 @smallexample
3841 1: branch 1f
3842 2: branch 1b
3843 1: branch 2f
3844 2: branch 1b
3845 @end smallexample
3846
3847 Which is the equivalent of:
3848
3849 @smallexample
3850 label_1: branch label_3
3851 label_2: branch label_1
3852 label_3: branch label_4
3853 label_4: branch label_3
3854 @end smallexample
3855
3856 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3857 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3858 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3859 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3860 these parts:
3861
3862 @table @code
3863 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3864 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3865 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3866 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3867 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3868 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3869 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3870 you may use them in debugging.
3871
3872 @item @var{number}
3873 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3874 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3875
3876 @item @kbd{C-B}
3877 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3878 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3879
3880 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3881 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3882 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3883 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3884 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3885 @end table
3886
3887 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3888 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3889
3890 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3891 @cindex dollar local symbols
3892
3893 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3894 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3895 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3896 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3897 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3898 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3899
3900 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3901 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3902 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3903
3904 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3905 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3906 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3907 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3908
3909 @node Dot
3910 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3911
3912 @cindex dot (symbol)
3913 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3914 @cindex current address
3915 @cindex location counter
3916 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3917 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3918 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3919 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3920 directive.
3921 @ifclear no-space-dir
3922 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3923 @samp{.space 4}.
3924 @end ifclear
3925
3926 @node Symbol Attributes
3927 @section Symbol Attributes
3928
3929 @cindex symbol attributes
3930 @cindex attributes, symbol
3931 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3932 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3933 attributes.
3934 @ifset INTERNALS
3935 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3936 @end ifset
3937
3938 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3939 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3940 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3941 would want.
3942
3943 @menu
3944 * Symbol Value:: Value
3945 * Symbol Type:: Type
3946 @ifset aout-bout
3947 @ifset GENERIC
3948 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3949 @end ifset
3950 @ifclear GENERIC
3951 @ifclear BOUT
3952 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3953 @end ifclear
3954 @ifset BOUT
3955 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3956 @end ifset
3957 @end ifclear
3958 @end ifset
3959 @ifset COFF
3960 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3961 @end ifset
3962 @ifset SOM
3963 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3964 @end ifset
3965 @end menu
3966
3967 @node Symbol Value
3968 @subsection Value
3969
3970 @cindex value of a symbol
3971 @cindex symbol value
3972 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3973 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3974 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3975 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3976 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3977 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3978 called absolute.
3979
3980 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3981 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3982 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3983 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3984 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3985 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3986 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3987 allocated storage.
3988
3989 @node Symbol Type
3990 @subsection Type
3991
3992 @cindex type of a symbol
3993 @cindex symbol type
3994 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3995 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3996 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3997 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3998
3999 @ifset aout-bout
4000 @ifclear GENERIC
4001 @ifset BOUT
4002 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4003 @c better if it were available outside examples.
4004 @need 1000
4005 @node a.out Symbols
4006 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4007
4008 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4009 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4010 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4011 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4012 @code{b.out}.
4013
4014 @end ifset
4015 @ifclear BOUT
4016 @node a.out Symbols
4017 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4018
4019 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4020 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4021
4022 @end ifclear
4023 @end ifclear
4024 @ifset GENERIC
4025 @node a.out Symbols
4026 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4027
4028 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4029 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4030
4031 @end ifset
4032 @menu
4033 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4034 * Symbol Other:: Other
4035 @end menu
4036
4037 @node Symbol Desc
4038 @subsubsection Descriptor
4039
4040 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4041 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4042 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4043 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4044 @command{@value{AS}}.
4045
4046 @node Symbol Other
4047 @subsubsection Other
4048
4049 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4050 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4051 @end ifset
4052
4053 @ifset COFF
4054 @node COFF Symbols
4055 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4056
4057 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4058 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4059
4060 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4061 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4062 @code{.endef} directives.
4063
4064 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4065
4066 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4067 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4068 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4069
4070 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4071
4072 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4073 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4074 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4075 table information for COFF.
4076 @end ifset
4077
4078 @ifset SOM
4079 @node SOM Symbols
4080 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4081
4082 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4083 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4084
4085 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4086 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4087
4088 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4089 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4090 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4091 @end ifset
4092
4093 @node Expressions
4094 @chapter Expressions
4095
4096 @cindex expressions
4097 @cindex addresses
4098 @cindex numeric values
4099 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4100 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4101
4102 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4103 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4104 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4105 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4106 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4107 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4108
4109 @menu
4110 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4111 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4112 @end menu
4113
4114 @node Empty Exprs
4115 @section Empty Expressions
4116
4117 @cindex empty expressions
4118 @cindex expressions, empty
4119 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4120 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4121 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4122 is compatible with other assemblers.
4123
4124 @node Integer Exprs
4125 @section Integer Expressions
4126
4127 @cindex integer expressions
4128 @cindex expressions, integer
4129 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4130 by @emph{operators}.
4131
4132 @menu
4133 * Arguments:: Arguments
4134 * Operators:: Operators
4135 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4136 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4137 @end menu
4138
4139 @node Arguments
4140 @subsection Arguments
4141
4142 @cindex expression arguments
4143 @cindex arguments in expressions
4144 @cindex operands in expressions
4145 @cindex arithmetic operands
4146 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4147 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4148 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4149 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4150 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4151 instruction operands.
4152
4153 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4154 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4155 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4156 integer.
4157
4158 Numbers are usually integers.
4159
4160 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4161 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4162 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4163 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4164 assemblers.
4165
4166 @cindex subexpressions
4167 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4168 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4169 operator followed by an argument.
4170
4171 @node Operators
4172 @subsection Operators
4173
4174 @cindex operators, in expressions
4175 @cindex arithmetic functions
4176 @cindex functions, in expressions
4177 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4178 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4179 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4180 whitespace.
4181
4182 @node Prefix Ops
4183 @subsection Prefix Operator
4184
4185 @cindex prefix operators
4186 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4187 one argument, which must be absolute.
4188
4189 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4190 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4191 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4192 @tex
4193 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4194 @end tex
4195
4196 @table @code
4197 @item -
4198 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4199 @item ~
4200 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4201 @end table
4202
4203 @tex
4204 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4205 @end tex
4206
4207 @node Infix Ops
4208 @subsection Infix Operators
4209
4210 @cindex infix operators
4211 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4212 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4213 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4214 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4215 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4216
4217 @enumerate
4218 @cindex operator precedence
4219 @cindex precedence of operators
4220
4221 @item
4222 Highest Precedence
4223
4224 @table @code
4225 @item *
4226 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4227
4228 @item /
4229 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4230
4231 @item %
4232 @dfn{Remainder}.
4233
4234 @item <<
4235 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4236
4237 @item >>
4238 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4239 @end table
4240
4241 @item
4242 Intermediate precedence
4243
4244 @table @code
4245 @item |
4246
4247 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4248
4249 @item &
4250 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4251
4252 @item ^
4253 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4254
4255 @item !
4256 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4257 @end table
4258
4259 @item
4260 Low Precedence
4261
4262 @table @code
4263 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4264 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4265 @cindex arguments for addition
4266 @item +
4267 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4268 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4269 sections.
4270
4271 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4272 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4273 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4274 @item -
4275 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4276 result has the section of the left argument.
4277 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4278 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4279 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4280
4281 @cindex comparison expressions
4282 @cindex expressions, comparison
4283 @item ==
4284 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4285 @item <>
4286 @itemx !=
4287 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4288 @item <
4289 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4290 @item >
4291 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4292 @item >=
4293 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4294 @item <=
4295 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4296
4297 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4298 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4299 perform signed comparisons.
4300 @end table
4301
4302 @item Lowest Precedence
4303
4304 @table @code
4305 @item &&
4306 @dfn{Logical And}.
4307
4308 @item ||
4309 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4310
4311 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4312 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4313 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4314 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4315
4316 @end table
4317 @end enumerate
4318
4319 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4320 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4321
4322 @node Pseudo Ops
4323 @chapter Assembler Directives
4324
4325 @cindex directives, machine independent
4326 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4327 @cindex machine independent directives
4328 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4329 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4330 in lower case.
4331
4332 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4333 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4334 @ifset GENERIC
4335 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4336 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4337 @end ifset
4338 @ifclear GENERIC
4339 @ifset machine-directives
4340 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4341 @end ifset
4342 @end ifclear
4343
4344 @menu
4345 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4346 @ifset COFF
4347 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4348 @end ifset
4349
4350 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4351 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4352 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4353 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4354 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4355 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4356 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4357 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4358 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4359 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4360 @ifset COFF
4361 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4362 @end ifset
4363 @ifset aout-bout
4364 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4365 @end ifset
4366 @ifset COFF
4367 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4368 @end ifset
4369
4370 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4371 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4372 * Else:: @code{.else}
4373 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4374 * End:: @code{.end}
4375 @ifset COFF
4376 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4377 @end ifset
4378
4379 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4380 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4381 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4382 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4383 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4384 * Err:: @code{.err}
4385 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4386 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4387 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4388 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4389 * File:: @code{.file}
4390 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4391 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4392 * Func:: @code{.func}
4393 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4394 @ifset ELF
4395 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4396 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4397 @end ifset
4398
4399 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4400 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4401 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4402 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4403 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4404 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4405 @ifset ELF
4406 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4407 @end ifset
4408
4409 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4410 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4411 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4412 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4413 @ifclear no-line-dir
4414 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4415 @end ifclear
4416
4417 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4418 * List:: @code{.list}
4419 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4420 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4421 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4422 @ifset ELF
4423 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4424 @end ifset
4425
4426 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4427 @ignore
4428 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4429 @end ignore
4430
4431 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4432 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4433 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4434 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4435 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4436 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4437 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4438 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4439 @ifset ELF
4440 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4441 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4442 @end ifset
4443
4444 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4445 @ifset ELF
4446 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4447 @end ifset
4448
4449 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4450 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4451 @ifset ELF
4452 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4453 @end ifset
4454
4455 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4456 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4457 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4458 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4459 @ifset COFF
4460 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4461 @end ifset
4462 @ifset COFF-ELF
4463 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4464 @end ifset
4465
4466 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4467 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4468 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4469 @ifset COFF-ELF
4470 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4471 @end ifset
4472 @ifclear no-space-dir
4473 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4474 @end ifclear
4475
4476 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4477 @ifclear no-space-dir
4478 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4479 @end ifclear
4480 @ifset have-stabs
4481 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4482 @end ifset
4483
4484 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4485 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4486 @ifset ELF
4487 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4488 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4489 @end ifset
4490
4491 @ifset COFF
4492 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4493 @end ifset
4494
4495 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4496 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4497 @ifset COFF-ELF
4498 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4499 @end ifset
4500
4501 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4502 @ifset COFF
4503 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4504 @end ifset
4505
4506 @ifset ELF
4507 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4508 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4509 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4510 @end ifset
4511
4512 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4513 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4514 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4515 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4516 @ifclear no-space-dir
4517 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4518 @end ifclear
4519 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4520 @end menu
4521
4522 @node Abort
4523 @section @code{.abort}
4524
4525 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4526 @cindex stopping the assembly
4527 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4528 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4529 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4530 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4531 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4532
4533 @ifset COFF
4534 @node ABORT (COFF)
4535 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4536
4537 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4538 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4539 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4540
4541 @ifset BOUT
4542 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4543 but ignores it.
4544 @end ifset
4545 @end ifset
4546
4547 @node Align
4548 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4549
4550 @cindex padding the location counter
4551 @cindex @code{align} directive
4552 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4553 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4554 required, as described below.
4555
4556 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4557 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4558 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4559 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4560 with no-op instructions.
4561
4562 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4563 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4564 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4565 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4566 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4567 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4568 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4569
4570 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4571 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4572 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4573 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4574 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4575 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4576 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4577
4578 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4579 strongarm, it is the
4580 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4581 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4582 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4583 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4584
4585 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4586 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4587 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4588 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4589 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4590
4591 @node Altmacro
4592 @section @code{.altmacro}
4593 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4594
4595 @ftable @code
4596 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4597 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4598 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4599 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4600 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4601 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4602 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4603
4604 @item String delimiters
4605 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4606 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4607
4608 @table @code
4609 @item '@var{string}'
4610 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4611
4612 @item <@var{string}>
4613 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4614 @end table
4615
4616 @item single-character string escape
4617 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4618 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4619 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4620 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4621
4622 @item Expression results as strings
4623 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4624 and use the result as a string.
4625 @end ftable
4626
4627 @node Ascii
4628 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4629
4630 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4631 @cindex string literals
4632 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4633 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4634 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4635
4636 @node Asciz
4637 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4638
4639 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4640 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4641 @cindex null-terminated strings
4642 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4643 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4644
4645 @node Balign
4646 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4647
4648 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4649 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4650 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4651 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4652 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4653 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4654 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4655
4656 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4657 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4658 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4659 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4660 with no-op instructions.
4661
4662 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4663 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4664 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4665 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4666 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4667 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4668 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4669
4670 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4671 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4672 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4673 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4674 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4675 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4676 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4677 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4678 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4679 undefined.
4680
4681 @node Bundle directives
4682 @section Bundle directives
4683 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4684 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4685 @cindex bundle
4686 @cindex instruction bundle
4687 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4688 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4689 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4690 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4691 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4692 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4693 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4694
4695 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4696 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4697 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4698 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4699 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4700 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4701 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4702 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4703 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4704 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4705 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4706
4707 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4708 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4709 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4710 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4711 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4712 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4713 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4714 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4715 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4716
4717 @cindex bundle-locked
4718 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4719 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4720 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4721 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4722 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4723 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4724 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4725 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4726 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4727 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4728 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4729 bundle size.
4730
4731 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4732 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4733 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4734 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4735 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4736 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4737
4738 @node Byte
4739 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4740
4741 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4742 @cindex integers, one byte
4743 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4744 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4745
4746 @node CFI directives
4747 @section CFI directives
4748 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4749 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4750 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4751 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4752 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4753 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4754 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4755 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4756
4757 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4758 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4759
4760 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4761 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4762
4763 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4764 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4765 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4766 redefine it will result in an error.
4767
4768 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4769 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4770 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4771 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4772 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4773 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4774
4775 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4776 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4777
4778 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4779 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4780 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4781 unwind entry previously opened by
4782 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4783
4784 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4785 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4786 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4787 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4788 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4789 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4790 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4791 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4792 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4793 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4794 no personality routine.
4795
4796 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4797 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4798 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4799 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4800 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4801 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4802
4803 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4804 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4805 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4806 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4807 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4808 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4809 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4810 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4811
4812 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4813 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4814 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4815 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4816 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4817 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4818 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4819
4820 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4821 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4822 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4823 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4824 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4825 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4826
4827 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4828 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4829 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4830 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4831 by a section directive.
4832
4833 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4834 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4835 @code{.p2align} directive.
4836
4837 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4838 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4839 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4840
4841 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4842 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4843 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4844 remains the same.
4845
4846 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4847 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4848 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4849 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4850 CFA address.
4851
4852 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4853 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4854 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4855
4856 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4857 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4858 CFA.
4859
4860 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4861 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4862
4863 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4864 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4865 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4866 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4867 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4868 code it's annotating.
4869
4870 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4871 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4872
4873 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4874 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4875 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4876 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4877
4878 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4879 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4880
4881 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4882 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4883 i.e. no restoration needed.
4884
4885 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4886 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4887 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4888 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4889 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4890 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4891 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4892
4893 @smallexample
4894 je label
4895 popq %rbx
4896 .cfi_restore %rbx
4897 popq %r12
4898 .cfi_restore %r12
4899 popq %rbp
4900 .cfi_restore %rbp
4901 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4902 ret
4903 label:
4904 /* Do something else */
4905 @end smallexample
4906
4907 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4908 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4909 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4910 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4911 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4912 we can write:
4913
4914 @smallexample
4915 je label
4916 popq %rbx
4917 .cfi_remember_state
4918 .cfi_restore %rbx
4919 popq %r12
4920 .cfi_restore %r12
4921 popq %rbp
4922 .cfi_restore %rbp
4923 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4924 ret
4925 label:
4926 .cfi_restore_state
4927 /* Do something else */
4928 @end smallexample
4929
4930 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4931 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4932 @code{.cfi} directives.
4933
4934 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4935 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4936 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4937
4938 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4939 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4940
4941 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4942 SPARC register window has been saved.
4943
4944 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4945 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4946 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4947 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4948
4949 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4950 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4951 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4952 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4953
4954 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4955 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4956 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4957 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4958 or another register.
4959
4960 @node Comm
4961 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4962
4963 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4964 @cindex symbol, common
4965 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4966 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4967 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4968 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4969 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4970 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4971 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4972 using the largest size.
4973
4974 @ifset COFF-ELF
4975 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4976 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4977 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4978 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4979 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4980 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4981 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4982 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4983 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4984 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4985 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4986 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4987 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4988 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4989 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4990 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4991 @end ifset
4992
4993 @ifset HPPA
4994 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4995 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4996 @end ifset
4997
4998 @node Data
4999 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5000
5001 @cindex @code{data} directive
5002 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5003 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5004 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5005 to zero.
5006
5007 @ifset COFF
5008 @node Def
5009 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5010
5011 @cindex @code{def} directive
5012 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5013 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5014 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5015 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5016 @ifset BOUT
5017
5018 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5019 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5020 but ignored.
5021 @end ifset
5022 @end ifset
5023
5024 @ifset aout-bout
5025 @node Desc
5026 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5027
5028 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5029 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5030 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5031 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5032 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5033
5034 @ifset COFF
5035 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5036 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5037 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5038 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5039 @end ifset
5040 @end ifset
5041
5042 @ifset COFF
5043 @node Dim
5044 @section @code{.dim}
5045
5046 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5047 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5048 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5049 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5050 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5051 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5052 @ifset BOUT
5053
5054 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5055 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5056 ignores it.
5057 @end ifset
5058 @end ifset
5059
5060 @node Double
5061 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5062
5063 @cindex @code{double} directive
5064 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5065 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5066 assembles floating point numbers.
5067 @ifset GENERIC
5068 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5069 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5070 @end ifset
5071 @ifclear GENERIC
5072 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5073 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5074 in @sc{ieee} format.
5075 @end ifset
5076 @end ifclear
5077
5078 @node Eject
5079 @section @code{.eject}
5080
5081 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5082 @cindex new page, in listings
5083 @cindex page, in listings
5084 @cindex listing control: new page
5085 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5086
5087 @node Else
5088 @section @code{.else}
5089
5090 @cindex @code{else} directive
5091 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5092 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5093 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5094 was false.
5095
5096 @node Elseif
5097 @section @code{.elseif}
5098
5099 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5100 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5101 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5102 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5103
5104 @node End
5105 @section @code{.end}
5106
5107 @cindex @code{end} directive
5108 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5109 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5110
5111 @ifset COFF
5112 @node Endef
5113 @section @code{.endef}
5114
5115 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5116 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5117 @code{.def}.
5118 @ifset BOUT
5119
5120 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5121 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5122 directive but ignores it.
5123 @end ifset
5124 @end ifset
5125
5126 @node Endfunc
5127 @section @code{.endfunc}
5128 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5129 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5130
5131 @node Endif
5132 @section @code{.endif}
5133
5134 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5135 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5136 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5137 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5138
5139 @node Equ
5140 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5141
5142 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5143 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5144 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5145 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5146 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5147
5148 @ifset HPPA
5149 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5150 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5151 @end ifset
5152
5153 @ifset Z80
5154 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5155 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5156 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5157 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5158 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5159 @end ifset
5160
5161 @node Equiv
5162 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5163 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5164 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5165 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5166 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5167 undefined.
5168
5169 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5170 @smallexample
5171 .ifdef SYM
5172 .err
5173 .endif
5174 .equ SYM,VAL
5175 @end smallexample
5176 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5177
5178 @node Eqv
5179 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5180 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5181 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5182 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5183 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5184 value is taken.
5185
5186 @node Err
5187 @section @code{.err}
5188 @cindex @code{err} directive
5189 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5190 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5191 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5192
5193 @node Error
5194 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5195 @cindex error directive
5196
5197 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5198 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5199 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5200 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5201
5202 @smallexample
5203 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5204 @end smallexample
5205
5206 @node Exitm
5207 @section @code{.exitm}
5208 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5209
5210 @node Extern
5211 @section @code{.extern}
5212
5213 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5214 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5215 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5216 all undefined symbols as external.
5217
5218 @node Fail
5219 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5220
5221 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5222 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5223 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5224 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5225 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5226 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5227
5228 @node File
5229 @section @code{.file}
5230 @cindex @code{file} directive
5231
5232 @ifclear no-file-dir
5233 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5234 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5235 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5236
5237 @subheading Default Version
5238
5239 @cindex logical file name
5240 @cindex file name, logical
5241 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5242 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5243
5244 @smallexample
5245 .file @var{string}
5246 @end smallexample
5247
5248 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5249 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5250 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5251 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5252 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5253
5254 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5255 @end ifclear
5256
5257 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5258 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5259
5260 @smallexample
5261 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5262 @end smallexample
5263
5264 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5265 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5266 literal.
5267
5268 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5269 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5270 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5271 entries will have.
5272
5273 @node Fill
5274 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5275
5276 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5277 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5278 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5279 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5280 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5281 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5282 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5283 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5284 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5285 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5286 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5287 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5288 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5289 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5290
5291 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5292 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5293 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5294 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5295
5296 @node Float
5297 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5298
5299 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5300 @cindex @code{float} directive
5301 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5302 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5303 @ifset GENERIC
5304 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5305 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5306 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5307 @end ifset
5308 @ifclear GENERIC
5309 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5310 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5311 in @sc{ieee} format.
5312 @end ifset
5313 @end ifclear
5314
5315 @node Func
5316 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5317 @cindex @code{func} directive
5318 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5319 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5320 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5321 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5322 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5323 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5324 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5325 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5326
5327 @node Global
5328 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5329
5330 @cindex @code{global} directive
5331 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5332 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5333 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5334 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5335 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5336 from another file linked into the same program.
5337
5338 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5339 compatibility with other assemblers.
5340
5341 @ifset HPPA
5342 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5343 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5344 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5345 @end ifset
5346
5347 @ifset ELF
5348 @node Gnu_attribute
5349 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5350 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5351
5352 @node Hidden
5353 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5354
5355 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5356 @cindex visibility
5357 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5358 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5359 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5360
5361 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5362 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5363 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5364 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5365 @end ifset
5366
5367 @node hword
5368 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5369
5370 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5371 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5372 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5373 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5374 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5375 a 16 bit number for each.
5376
5377 @ifset GENERIC
5378 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5379 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5380 @end ifset
5381 @ifclear GENERIC
5382 @ifset W32
5383 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5384 @end ifset
5385 @ifset W16
5386 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5387 @end ifset
5388 @end ifclear
5389
5390 @node Ident
5391 @section @code{.ident}
5392
5393 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5394
5395 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5396 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5397 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5398 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5399 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5400 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5401 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5402
5403 @node If
5404 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5405
5406 @cindex conditional assembly
5407 @cindex @code{if} directive
5408 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5409 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5410 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5411 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5412 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5413 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5414 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5415 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5416
5417 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5418 @table @code
5419 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5420 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5421 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5422 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5423 is considered to be undefined.
5424
5425 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5426 @item .ifb @var{text}
5427 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5428
5429 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5430 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5431 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5432 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5433 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5434 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5435 string comparison is case sensitive.
5436
5437 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5438 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5439 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5440
5441 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5442 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5443 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5444
5445 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5446 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5447 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5448 equal to zero.
5449
5450 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5451 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5452 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5453
5454 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5455 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5456 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5457 to zero.
5458
5459 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5460 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5461 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5462
5463 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5464 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5465 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5466 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5467
5468 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5469 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5470 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5471 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5472
5473 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5474 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5475 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5476 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5477 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5478 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5479 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5480
5481 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5482 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5483 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5484 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5485
5486 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5487 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5488 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5489 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5490 @end table
5491
5492 @node Incbin
5493 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5494
5495 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5496 @cindex binary files, including
5497 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5498 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5499 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5500 around @var{file}.
5501
5502 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5503 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5504 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5505 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5506 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5507
5508 @node Include
5509 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5510
5511 @cindex @code{include} directive
5512 @cindex supporting files, including
5513 @cindex files, including
5514 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5515 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5516 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5517 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5518 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5519 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5520 around @var{file}.
5521
5522 @node Int
5523 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5524
5525 @cindex @code{int} directive
5526 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5527 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5528 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5529 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5530 of target the assembly is for.
5531
5532 @ifclear GENERIC
5533 @ifset H8
5534 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5535 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5536 32-bit integers.
5537 @end ifset
5538 @end ifclear
5539
5540 @ifset ELF
5541 @node Internal
5542 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5543
5544 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5545 @cindex visibility
5546 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5547 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5548 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5549
5550 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5551 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5552 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5553 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5554 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5555 @end ifset
5556
5557 @node Irp
5558 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5559
5560 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5561 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5562 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5563 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5564 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5565 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5566 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5567 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5568
5569 For example, assembling
5570
5571 @example
5572 .irp param,1,2,3
5573 move d\param,sp@@-
5574 .endr
5575 @end example
5576
5577 is equivalent to assembling
5578
5579 @example
5580 move d1,sp@@-
5581 move d2,sp@@-
5582 move d3,sp@@-
5583 @end example
5584
5585 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5586
5587 @node Irpc
5588 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5589
5590 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5591 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5592 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5593 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5594 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5595 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5596 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5597 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5598
5599 For example, assembling
5600
5601 @example
5602 .irpc param,123
5603 move d\param,sp@@-
5604 .endr
5605 @end example
5606
5607 is equivalent to assembling
5608
5609 @example
5610 move d1,sp@@-
5611 move d2,sp@@-
5612 move d3,sp@@-
5613 @end example
5614
5615 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5616 at @xref{Macro}.
5617
5618 @node Lcomm
5619 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5620
5621 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5622 @cindex local common symbols
5623 @cindex symbols, local common
5624 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5625 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5626 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5627 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5628 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5629 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5630
5631 @ifset GENERIC
5632 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5633 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5634 @end ifset
5635
5636 @ifset HPPA
5637 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5638 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5639 @end ifset
5640
5641 @node Lflags
5642 @section @code{.lflags}
5643
5644 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5645 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5646 assemblers, but ignores it.
5647
5648 @ifclear no-line-dir
5649 @node Line
5650 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5651
5652 @cindex @code{line} directive
5653 @cindex logical line number
5654 @ifset aout-bout
5655 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5656 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5657 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5658 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5659 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5660 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5661 @end ifset
5662
5663 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5664 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5665 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5666 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5667 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5668
5669 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5670 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5671 debugging.
5672 @end ifclear
5673
5674 @node Linkonce
5675 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5676 @cindex COMDAT
5677 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5678 @cindex common sections
5679 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5680 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5681 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5682 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5683 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5684 unique.
5685
5686 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5687 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5688 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5689
5690 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5691 following strings. For example:
5692 @smallexample
5693 .linkonce same_size
5694 @end smallexample
5695 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5696
5697 @table @code
5698 @item discard
5699 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5700
5701 @item one_only
5702 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5703
5704 @item same_size
5705 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5706
5707 @item same_contents
5708 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5709 @end table
5710
5711 @node List
5712 @section @code{.list}
5713
5714 @cindex @code{list} directive
5715 @cindex listing control, turning on
5716 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5717 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5718 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5719 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5720 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5721
5722 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5723 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5724 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5725
5726 @node Ln
5727 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5728
5729 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5730 @ifclear no-line-dir
5731 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5732 @end ifclear
5733 @ifset no-line-dir
5734 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5735 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5736 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5737 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5738 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5739 @ifset BOUT
5740
5741 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5742 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5743 output format.
5744 @end ifset
5745 @end ifset
5746
5747 @node Loc
5748 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5749 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5750 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5751 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5752 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5753 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5754 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5755 the row is added.
5756
5757 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5758
5759 @table @code
5760 @item basic_block
5761 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5762 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5763
5764 @item prologue_end
5765 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5766 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5767
5768 @item epilogue_begin
5769 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5770 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5771
5772 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5773 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5774 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5775 either 0 or 1.
5776
5777 @item isa @var{value}
5778 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5779 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5780
5781 @item discriminator @var{value}
5782 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5783 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5784
5785 @end table
5786
5787 @node Loc_mark_labels
5788 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5789 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5790 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5791 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5792 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5793 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5794 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5795 this function respectively.
5796
5797 @ifset ELF
5798 @node Local
5799 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5800
5801 @cindex @code{local} directive
5802 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5803 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5804 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5805 they will be created.
5806
5807 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5808 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5809 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5810 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5811 @end ifset
5812
5813 @node Long
5814 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5815
5816 @cindex @code{long} directive
5817 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5818
5819 @ignore
5820 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5821 @c what it really ought to do
5822 @node Lsym
5823 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5824
5825 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5826 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5827 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5828 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5829 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5830 the same as the expression value:
5831 @smallexample
5832 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5833 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5834 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5835 @end smallexample
5836 @noindent
5837 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5838 @end ignore
5839
5840 @node Macro
5841 @section @code{.macro}
5842
5843 @cindex macros
5844 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5845 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5846 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5847
5848 @example
5849 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5850 .long \from
5851 .if \to-\from
5852 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5853 .endif
5854 .endm
5855 @end example
5856
5857 @noindent
5858 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5859
5860 @example
5861 .long 0
5862 .long 1
5863 .long 2
5864 .long 3
5865 .long 4
5866 .long 5
5867 @end example
5868
5869 @ftable @code
5870 @item .macro @var{macname}
5871 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5872 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5873 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5874 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5875 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5876 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5877 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5878 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5879 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5880 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5881 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5882 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5883
5884 @table @code
5885 @item .macro comm
5886 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5887 arguments.
5888
5889 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5890 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5891 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5892 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5893 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5894
5895 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5896 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5897 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5898 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5899 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5900 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5901 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5902 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5903
5904 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5905 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5906 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5907 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5908 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5909
5910 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5911 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5912 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5913
5914 @end table
5915
5916 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5917 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5918 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5919 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5920 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5921 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5922 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5923 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5924 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5925 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5926 this macro definition:
5927
5928 @example
5929 .macro label l
5930 \l:
5931 .endm
5932 @end example
5933
5934 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5935 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5936 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5937 identifier.
5938
5939 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5940 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5941 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5942 length specifier like this:
5943
5944 @example
5945 .macro opcode base length
5946 \base.\length
5947 .endm
5948 @end example
5949
5950 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5951 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5952 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5953
5954 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5955
5956 @table @code
5957 @item Insert white space
5958 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5959 solution. eg:
5960
5961 @example
5962 .macro label l
5963 \l :
5964 .endm
5965 @end example
5966
5967 @item Use @samp{\()}
5968 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5969 the following text. eg:
5970
5971 @example
5972 .macro opcode base length
5973 \base\().\length
5974 .endm
5975 @end example
5976
5977 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5978 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5979 used as a separator. eg:
5980
5981 @example
5982 .altmacro
5983 .macro label l
5984 l&:
5985 .endm
5986 @end example
5987 @end table
5988
5989 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5990 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5991 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5992
5993 @item .endm
5994 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5995 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5996
5997 @item .exitm
5998 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5999 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6000
6001 @cindex number of macros executed
6002 @cindex macros, count executed
6003 @item \@@
6004 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6005 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6006 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6007
6008 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6009 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6010 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6011 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6012 @end ftable
6013
6014 @node MRI
6015 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6016
6017 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6018 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6019 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6020 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6021 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6022 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6023
6024 @node Noaltmacro
6025 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6026 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6027
6028 @node Nolist
6029 @section @code{.nolist}
6030
6031 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6032 @cindex listing control, turning off
6033 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6034 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6035 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6036 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6037 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6038
6039 @node Octa
6040 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6041
6042 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6043 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6044 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6045 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6046 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6047 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6048
6049 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6050 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6051
6052 @node Offset
6053 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6054
6055 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6056 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6057 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6058 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6059 directive.
6060
6061 @node Org
6062 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6063
6064 @cindex @code{org} directive
6065 @cindex location counter, advancing
6066 @cindex advancing location counter
6067 @cindex current address, advancing
6068 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6069 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6070 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6071 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6072 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6073 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6074 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6075 is the same as the current subsection.
6076
6077 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6078 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6079 backwards.
6080
6081 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6082 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6083 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6084 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6085 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6086 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6087
6088 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6089 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6090 people's assemblers.
6091
6092 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6093 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6094 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6095 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6096
6097 @node P2align
6098 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6099
6100 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6101 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6102 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6103 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6104 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6105 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6106 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6107 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6108
6109 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6110 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6111 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6112 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6113 with no-op instructions.
6114
6115 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6116 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6117 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6118 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6119 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6120 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6121 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6122
6123 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6124 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6125 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6126 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6127 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6128 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6129 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6130 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6131 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6132 undefined.
6133
6134 @ifset ELF
6135 @node PopSection
6136 @section @code{.popsection}
6137
6138 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6139 @cindex Section Stack
6140 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6141 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6142 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6143 (@pxref{Previous}).
6144
6145 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6146 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6147 stack.
6148 @end ifset
6149
6150 @ifset ELF
6151 @node Previous
6152 @section @code{.previous}
6153
6154 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6155 @cindex Section Stack
6156 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6157 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6158 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6159 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6160
6161 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6162 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6163 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6164 subsections). For example:
6165
6166 @smallexample
6167 .section A
6168 .subsection 1
6169 .word 0x1234
6170 .subsection 2
6171 .word 0x5678
6172 .previous
6173 .word 0x9abc
6174 @end smallexample
6175
6176 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6177 section A. Whilst:
6178
6179 @smallexample
6180 .section A
6181 .subsection 1
6182 # Now in section A subsection 1
6183 .word 0x1234
6184 .section B
6185 .subsection 0
6186 # Now in section B subsection 0
6187 .word 0x5678
6188 .subsection 1
6189 # Now in section B subsection 1
6190 .word 0x9abc
6191 .previous
6192 # Now in section B subsection 0
6193 .word 0xdef0
6194 @end smallexample
6195
6196 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6197 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6198
6199 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6200 the top section on the section stack.
6201 @end ifset
6202
6203 @node Print
6204 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6205
6206 @cindex @code{print} directive
6207 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6208 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6209
6210 @ifset ELF
6211 @node Protected
6212 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6213
6214 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6215 @cindex visibility
6216 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6217 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6218
6219 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6220 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6221 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6222 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6223 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6224 this.
6225 @end ifset
6226
6227 @node Psize
6228 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6229
6230 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6231 @cindex listing control: paper size
6232 @cindex paper size, for listings
6233 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6234 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6235
6236 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6237 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6238 default width is 200 columns.
6239
6240 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6241 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6242 @code{.eject}).
6243
6244 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6245 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6246
6247 @node Purgem
6248 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6249
6250 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6251 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6252 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6253
6254 @ifset ELF
6255 @node PushSection
6256 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6257
6258 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6259 @cindex Section Stack
6260 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6261 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6262 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6263 (@pxref{Previous}).
6264
6265 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6266 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6267 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6268 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6269 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6270 @end ifset
6271
6272 @node Quad
6273 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6274
6275 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6276 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6277 each bignum, it emits
6278 @ifclear bignum-16
6279 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6280 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6281 @cindex eight-byte integer
6282 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6283
6284 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6285 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6286 @end ifclear
6287 @ifset bignum-16
6288 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6289 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6290 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6291 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6292 @end ifset
6293
6294 @node Reloc
6295 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6296
6297 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6298 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6299 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6300 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6301 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6302 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6303 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6304 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6305 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6306 section.
6307
6308 @node Rept
6309 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6310
6311 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6312 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6313 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6314
6315 For example, assembling
6316
6317 @example
6318 .rept 3
6319 .long 0
6320 .endr
6321 @end example
6322
6323 is equivalent to assembling
6324
6325 @example
6326 .long 0
6327 .long 0
6328 .long 0
6329 @end example
6330
6331 @node Sbttl
6332 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6333
6334 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6335 @cindex subtitles for listings
6336 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6337 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6338 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6339
6340 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6341 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6342
6343 @ifset COFF
6344 @node Scl
6345 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6346
6347 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6348 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6349 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6350 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6351 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6352 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6353 symbolic debugging information.
6354 @ifset BOUT
6355
6356 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6357 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6358 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6359 @end ifset
6360 @end ifset
6361
6362 @ifset COFF-ELF
6363 @node Section
6364 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6365
6366 @cindex named section
6367 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6368 named @var{name}.
6369
6370 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6371 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6372 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6373
6374 @ifset COFF
6375 @ifset ELF
6376 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6377 @subheading COFF Version
6378 @end ifset
6379
6380 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6381 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6382 ways:
6383
6384 @smallexample
6385 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6386 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6387 @end smallexample
6388
6389 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6390 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6391
6392 @table @code
6393 @item b
6394 bss section (uninitialized data)
6395 @item n
6396 section is not loaded
6397 @item w
6398 writable section
6399 @item d
6400 data section
6401 @item e
6402 exclude section from linking
6403 @item r
6404 read-only section
6405 @item x
6406 executable section
6407 @item s
6408 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6409 @item a
6410 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6411 @item y
6412 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6413 @item 0-9
6414 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6415 @end table
6416
6417 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6418 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6419 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6420 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6421 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6422
6423 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6424 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6425 @end ifset
6426
6427 @ifset ELF
6428 @ifset COFF
6429 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6430 @subheading ELF Version
6431 @end ifset
6432
6433 @cindex Section Stack
6434 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6435 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6436 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6437 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6438
6439 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6440 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6441
6442 @smallexample
6443 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6444 @end smallexample
6445
6446 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6447 @kindex --sectname-subst
6448 @cindex section name substitution
6449 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6450 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6451 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6452
6453 @smallexample
6454 .macro exception_code
6455 .section %S.exception
6456 [exception code here]
6457 .previous
6458 .endm
6459
6460 .text
6461 [code]
6462 exception_code
6463 [...]
6464
6465 .section .init
6466 [init code]
6467 exception_code
6468 [...]
6469 @end smallexample
6470
6471 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6472 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6473 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6474 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6475 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6476 macros just for that purpose.
6477
6478 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6479 combination of the following characters:
6480
6481 @table @code
6482 @item a
6483 section is allocatable
6484 @item e
6485 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6486 @item w
6487 section is writable
6488 @item x
6489 section is executable
6490 @item M
6491 section is mergeable
6492 @item S
6493 section contains zero terminated strings
6494 @item G
6495 section is a member of a section group
6496 @item T
6497 section is used for thread-local-storage
6498 @item ?
6499 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6500 @item @code{<number>}
6501 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6502 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6503 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6504 resulting value.
6505 @item @code{<target specific>}
6506 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6507 @end table
6508
6509 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6510 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6511 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6512 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6513 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6514 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6515
6516 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6517
6518 @table @code
6519 @item @@progbits
6520 section contains data
6521 @item @@nobits
6522 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6523 @item @@note
6524 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6525 @item @@init_array
6526 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6527 @item @@fini_array
6528 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6529 @item @@preinit_array
6530 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6531 @item @@@code{<number>}
6532 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6533 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6534 some targets extend this list with their own types
6535 @end table
6536
6537 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6538 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6539
6540 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6541 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6542 @code{%} character.
6543
6544 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6545 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6546 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6547
6548 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6549 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6550
6551 @smallexample
6552 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6553 @end smallexample
6554
6555 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6556 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6557 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6558 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6559 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6560 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6561 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6562 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6563 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6564
6565 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6566 be present along with an additional field like this:
6567
6568 @smallexample
6569 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6570 @end smallexample
6571
6572 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6573 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6574
6575 @table @code
6576 @item comdat
6577 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6578 @item .gnu.linkonce
6579 an alias for comdat
6580 @end table
6581
6582 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6583 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6584
6585 @smallexample
6586 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6587 @end smallexample
6588
6589 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6590 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6591 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6592 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6593 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6594 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6595
6596 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6597 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6598 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6599 executable. The section will contain data.
6600
6601 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6602 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6603
6604 @smallexample
6605 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6606 @end smallexample
6607
6608 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6609 separated flags:
6610
6611 @table @code
6612 @item #alloc
6613 section is allocatable
6614 @item #write
6615 section is writable
6616 @item #execinstr
6617 section is executable
6618 @item #exclude
6619 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6620 @item #tls
6621 section is used for thread local storage
6622 @end table
6623
6624 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6625 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6626 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6627 work.
6628 @end ifset
6629 @end ifset
6630
6631 @node Set
6632 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6633
6634 @cindex @code{set} directive
6635 @cindex symbol value, setting
6636 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6637 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6638 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6639 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6640
6641 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6642 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6643 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6644 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6645 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6646 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6647 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6648 different symbols.
6649
6650 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6651 file is the last value stored into it.
6652
6653 @ifset Z80
6654 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6655 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6656 @end ifset
6657
6658 @node Short
6659 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6660
6661 @cindex @code{short} directive
6662 @ifset GENERIC
6663 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6664 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6665
6666 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6667 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6668 @end ifset
6669 @ifclear GENERIC
6670 @ifset W16
6671 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6672 @end ifset
6673 @ifset W32
6674 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6675 a 16 bit number for each.
6676 @end ifset
6677 @end ifclear
6678
6679 @node Single
6680 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6681
6682 @cindex @code{single} directive
6683 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6684 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6685 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6686 @ifset GENERIC
6687 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6688 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6689 @end ifset
6690 @ifclear GENERIC
6691 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6692 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6693 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6694 @end ifset
6695 @end ifclear
6696
6697 @ifset COFF-ELF
6698 @node Size
6699 @section @code{.size}
6700
6701 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6702
6703 @ifset COFF
6704 @ifset ELF
6705 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6706 @subheading COFF Version
6707 @end ifset
6708
6709 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6710 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6711 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6712
6713 @smallexample
6714 .size @var{expression}
6715 @end smallexample
6716
6717 @ifset BOUT
6718 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6719 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6720 ignores it.
6721 @end ifset
6722 @end ifset
6723
6724 @ifset ELF
6725 @ifset COFF
6726 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6727 @subheading ELF Version
6728 @end ifset
6729
6730 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6731 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6732
6733 @smallexample
6734 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6735 @end smallexample
6736
6737 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6738 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6739 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6740 symbols.
6741 @end ifset
6742 @end ifset
6743
6744 @ifclear no-space-dir
6745 @node Skip
6746 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6747
6748 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6749 @cindex filling memory
6750 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6751 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6752 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6753 @samp{.space}.
6754 @end ifclear
6755
6756 @node Sleb128
6757 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6758
6759 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6760 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6761 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6762 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6763
6764 @ifclear no-space-dir
6765 @node Space
6766 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6767
6768 @cindex @code{space} directive
6769 @cindex filling memory
6770 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6771 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6772 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6773 as @samp{.skip}.
6774
6775 @ifset HPPA
6776 @quotation
6777 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6778 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6779 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6780 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6781 for a summary.
6782 @end quotation
6783 @end ifset
6784 @end ifclear
6785
6786 @ifset have-stabs
6787 @node Stab
6788 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6789
6790 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6791 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6792 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6793 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6794 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6795 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6796 Up to five fields are required:
6797
6798 @table @var
6799 @item string
6800 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6801 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6802 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6803 using this field.
6804
6805 @item type
6806 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6807 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6808 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6809
6810 @item other
6811 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6812 low 8 bits of this expression.
6813
6814 @item desc
6815 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6816 bits of this expression.
6817
6818 @item value
6819 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6820 @end table
6821
6822 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6823 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6824 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6825 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6826
6827 @table @code
6828 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6829 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6830
6831 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6832 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6833 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6834 strings.
6835
6836 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6837 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6838 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6839 assembled.
6840
6841 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6842 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6843 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6844
6845 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6846 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6847 All five fields are specified.
6848 @end table
6849 @end ifset
6850 @c end have-stabs
6851
6852 @node String
6853 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6854 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6855
6856 @cindex string, copying to object file
6857 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6858 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6859 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6860 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6861 @cindex @code{string} directive
6862 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6863 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6864 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6865 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6866
6867 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6868 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6869 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6870 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6871
6872 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6873 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6874 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6875 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6876
6877 Example:
6878 @smallexample
6879 .string32 "BYE"
6880 expands to:
6881 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6882 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6883 @end smallexample
6884
6885
6886 @node Struct
6887 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6888
6889 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6890 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6891 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6892 @smallexample
6893 .struct 0
6894 field1:
6895 .struct field1 + 4
6896 field2:
6897 .struct field2 + 4
6898 field3:
6899 @end smallexample
6900 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6901 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6902 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6903 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6904 before further assembly.
6905
6906 @ifset ELF
6907 @node SubSection
6908 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6909
6910 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6911 @cindex Section Stack
6912 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6913 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6914 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6915 (@pxref{Previous}).
6916
6917 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6918 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6919 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6920 @end ifset
6921
6922 @ifset ELF
6923 @node Symver
6924 @section @code{.symver}
6925 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6926 @cindex symbol versioning
6927 @cindex versions of symbols
6928 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6929 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6930 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6931 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6932 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6933 shared library.
6934
6935 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6936 @smallexample
6937 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6938 @end smallexample
6939 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6940 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6941 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6942 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6943 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6944 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6945 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6946 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6947 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6948 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6949 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6950 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6951 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6952 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6953
6954 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6955 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6956 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6957 symbol table.
6958
6959 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6960 @smallexample
6961 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6962 @end smallexample
6963 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6964 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6965 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6966 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6967
6968 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6969 @smallexample
6970 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6971 @end smallexample
6972 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6973 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6974 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6975 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6976 @end ifset
6977
6978 @ifset COFF
6979 @node Tag
6980 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6981
6982 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6983 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6984 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6985 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6986 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6987 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6988 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6989 @ifset BOUT
6990
6991 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6992 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6993 ignores it.
6994 @end ifset
6995 @end ifset
6996
6997 @node Text
6998 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6999
7000 @cindex @code{text} directive
7001 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7002 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7003 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7004 is used.
7005
7006 @node Title
7007 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7008
7009 @cindex @code{title} directive
7010 @cindex listing control: title line
7011 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7012 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7013
7014 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7015 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7016
7017 @ifset COFF-ELF
7018 @node Type
7019 @section @code{.type}
7020
7021 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7022
7023 @ifset COFF
7024 @ifset ELF
7025 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7026 @subheading COFF Version
7027 @end ifset
7028
7029 @cindex COFF symbol type
7030 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7031 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7032 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7033 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7034
7035 @smallexample
7036 .type @var{int}
7037 @end smallexample
7038
7039 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7040 entry.
7041
7042 @ifset BOUT
7043 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7044 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7045 directive but ignores it.
7046 @end ifset
7047 @end ifset
7048
7049 @ifset ELF
7050 @ifset COFF
7051 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7052 @subheading ELF Version
7053 @end ifset
7054
7055 @cindex ELF symbol type
7056 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7057 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7058 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7059
7060 @smallexample
7061 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7062 @end smallexample
7063
7064 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7065 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7066 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7067 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7068
7069 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7070 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7071 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7072 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7073 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7074 assemblers.
7075
7076 The syntaxes supported are:
7077
7078 @smallexample
7079 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7080 .type <name>,#<type>
7081 .type <name>,@@<type>
7082 .type <name>,%<type>
7083 .type <name>,"<type>"
7084 @end smallexample
7085
7086 The types supported are:
7087
7088 @table @gcctabopt
7089 @item STT_FUNC
7090 @itemx function
7091 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7092
7093 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7094 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7095 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7096 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7097
7098 @item STT_OBJECT
7099 @itemx object
7100 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7101
7102 @item STT_TLS
7103 @itemx tls_object
7104 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7105
7106 @item STT_COMMON
7107 @itemx common
7108 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7109
7110 @item STT_NOTYPE
7111 @itemx notype
7112 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7113
7114 @item gnu_unique_object
7115 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7116 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7117 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7118 systems).
7119
7120 @end table
7121
7122 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7123
7124 @end ifset
7125 @end ifset
7126
7127 @node Uleb128
7128 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7129
7130 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7131 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7132 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7133 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7134
7135 @ifset COFF
7136 @node Val
7137 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7138
7139 @cindex @code{val} directive
7140 @cindex COFF value attribute
7141 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7142 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7143 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7144 entry.
7145 @ifset BOUT
7146
7147 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7148 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7149 @end ifset
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @ifset ELF
7153 @node Version
7154 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7155
7156 @cindex @code{version} directive
7157 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7158 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7159 @end ifset
7160
7161 @ifset ELF
7162 @node VTableEntry
7163 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7164
7165 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7166 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7167 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7168
7169 @node VTableInherit
7170 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7171
7172 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7173 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7174 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7175 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7176 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7177 @end ifset
7178
7179 @node Warning
7180 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7181 @cindex warning directive
7182 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7183 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7184
7185 @node Weak
7186 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7187
7188 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7189 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7190 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7191
7192 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7193 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7194 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7195
7196 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7197 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7198 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7199
7200 @node Weakref
7201 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7202
7203 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7204 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7205 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7206 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7207 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7208 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7209
7210 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7211 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7212 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7213 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7214 had the references to the alias removed.
7215
7216 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7217 within the assembler.
7218
7219 @node Word
7220 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7221
7222 @cindex @code{word} directive
7223 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7224 separated by commas.
7225 @ifclear GENERIC
7226 @ifset W32
7227 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7228 @end ifset
7229 @ifset W16
7230 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7231 @end ifset
7232 @end ifclear
7233 @ifset GENERIC
7234
7235 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7236 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7237 @end ifset
7238
7239 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7240 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7241 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7242 @cindex difference tables altered
7243 @cindex altered difference tables
7244 @quotation
7245 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7246 @end quotation
7247
7248 @ifset GENERIC
7249 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7250 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7251 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7252 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7253
7254 @end ifset
7255 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7256 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7257 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7258 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7259 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7260 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7261 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7262 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7263 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7264 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7265 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7266 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7267 @code{sym2}.
7268
7269 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7270 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7271 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7272 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7273 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7274 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7275 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7276
7277 @ifset INTERNALS
7278 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7279 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7280 assembly language programmers.
7281 @end ifset
7282 @end ifset
7283 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7284
7285 @ifclear no-space-dir
7286 @node Zero
7287 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7288
7289 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7290 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7291 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7292 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7293 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7294 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7295 @end ifclear
7296
7297 @node Deprecated
7298 @section Deprecated Directives
7299
7300 @cindex deprecated directives
7301 @cindex obsolescent directives
7302 One day these directives won't work.
7303 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7304 @table @t
7305 @item .abort
7306 @item .line
7307 @end table
7308
7309 @ifset ELF
7310 @node Object Attributes
7311 @chapter Object Attributes
7312 @cindex object attributes
7313
7314 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7315 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7316 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7317 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7318 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7319 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7320 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7321 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7322 newer generation at run-time.
7323
7324 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7325 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7326 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7327 correctly.
7328
7329 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7330 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7331 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7332 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7333 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7334 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7335
7336 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7337 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7338
7339 @menu
7340 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7341 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7342 @end menu
7343
7344 @node GNU Object Attributes
7345 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7346
7347 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7348 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7349
7350 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7351 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7352 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7353 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7354 architecture-dependent ones.
7355
7356 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7357
7358 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7359
7360 @table @r
7361 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7362 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7363 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7364 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7365 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7366 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7367 @end table
7368
7369 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7370
7371 @table @r
7372 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7373 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7374
7375 @itemize @bullet
7376 @item
7377 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7378 @item
7379 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7380 double-precision FPU.
7381 @item
7382 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7383 @item
7384 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7385 @item
7386 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7387 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7388 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7389 @item
7390 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7391 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7392 general-purpose registers.
7393 @item
7394 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7395 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7396 @item
7397 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7398 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7399 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7400 @end itemize
7401 @end table
7402
7403 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7404
7405 @table @r
7406 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7407 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7408
7409 @itemize @bullet
7410 @item
7411 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7412 @item
7413 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7414 @item
7415 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7416 @item
7417 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7418 @end itemize
7419
7420 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7421 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7422
7423 @itemize @bullet
7424 @item
7425 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7426 @item
7427 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7428 @item
7429 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7430 @item
7431 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7432 @end itemize
7433 @end table
7434
7435 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7436
7437 @table @r
7438 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7439 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7440
7441 @itemize @bullet
7442 @item
7443 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7444 @item
7445 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7446 @item
7447 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7448 @end itemize
7449 @end table
7450
7451 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7452 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7453
7454 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7455 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7456 mailing list.
7457
7458 @itemize @bullet
7459 @item
7460 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7461 @item
7462 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7463 @item
7464 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7465 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7466 @item
7467 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7468 @item
7469 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7470 @item
7471 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7472 @end itemize
7473
7474 @end ifset
7475
7476 @ifset GENERIC
7477 @node Machine Dependencies
7478 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7479
7480 @cindex machine dependencies
7481 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7482 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7483 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7484 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7485 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7486 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7487 optimization.
7488
7489 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7490 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7491 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7492
7493 @menu
7494 @ifset AARCH64
7495 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7496 @end ifset
7497 @ifset ALPHA
7498 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7499 @end ifset
7500 @ifset ARC
7501 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7502 @end ifset
7503 @ifset ARM
7504 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7505 @end ifset
7506 @ifset AVR
7507 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7508 @end ifset
7509 @ifset Blackfin
7510 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7511 @end ifset
7512 @ifset CR16
7513 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7514 @end ifset
7515 @ifset CRIS
7516 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7517 @end ifset
7518 @ifset D10V
7519 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7520 @end ifset
7521 @ifset D30V
7522 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7523 @end ifset
7524 @ifset EPIPHANY
7525 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7526 @end ifset
7527 @ifset H8/300
7528 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7529 @end ifset
7530 @ifset HPPA
7531 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7532 @end ifset
7533 @ifset I370
7534 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7535 @end ifset
7536 @ifset I80386
7537 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7538 @end ifset
7539 @ifset I860
7540 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7541 @end ifset
7542 @ifset I960
7543 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7544 @end ifset
7545 @ifset IA64
7546 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7547 @end ifset
7548 @ifset IP2K
7549 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7550 @end ifset
7551 @ifset LM32
7552 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7553 @end ifset
7554 @ifset M32C
7555 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7556 @end ifset
7557 @ifset M32R
7558 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7559 @end ifset
7560 @ifset M680X0
7561 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7562 @end ifset
7563 @ifset M68HC11
7564 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7565 @end ifset
7566 @ifset METAG
7567 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7568 @end ifset
7569 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7570 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7571 @end ifset
7572 @ifset MIPS
7573 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7574 @end ifset
7575 @ifset MMIX
7576 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7577 @end ifset
7578 @ifset MSP430
7579 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7580 @end ifset
7581 @ifset NDS32
7582 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7583 @end ifset
7584 @ifset NIOSII
7585 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7586 @end ifset
7587 @ifset NS32K
7588 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7589 @end ifset
7590 @ifset PDP11
7591 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7592 @end ifset
7593 @ifset PJ
7594 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7595 @end ifset
7596 @ifset PPC
7597 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7598 @end ifset
7599 @ifset RL78
7600 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7601 @end ifset
7602 @ifset RISCV
7603 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7604 @end ifset
7605 @ifset RX
7606 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7607 @end ifset
7608 @ifset S390
7609 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7610 @end ifset
7611 @ifset SCORE
7612 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7613 @end ifset
7614 @ifset SH
7615 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7616 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7617 @end ifset
7618 @ifset SPARC
7619 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7620 @end ifset
7621 @ifset TIC54X
7622 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7623 @end ifset
7624 @ifset TIC6X
7625 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7626 @end ifset
7627 @ifset TILEGX
7628 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7629 @end ifset
7630 @ifset TILEPRO
7631 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7632 @end ifset
7633 @ifset V850
7634 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7635 @end ifset
7636 @ifset VAX
7637 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7638 @end ifset
7639 @ifset VISIUM
7640 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7641 @end ifset
7642 @ifset XGATE
7643 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7644 @end ifset
7645 @ifset XSTORMY16
7646 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7647 @end ifset
7648 @ifset XTENSA
7649 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7650 @end ifset
7651 @ifset Z80
7652 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7653 @end ifset
7654 @ifset Z8000
7655 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7656 @end ifset
7657 @end menu
7658
7659 @lowersections
7660 @end ifset
7661
7662 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7663 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7664 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7665 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7666 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7667 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7668 @c in both conditional blocks.
7669
7670 @ifset AARCH64
7671 @include c-aarch64.texi
7672 @end ifset
7673
7674 @ifset ALPHA
7675 @include c-alpha.texi
7676 @end ifset
7677
7678 @ifset ARC
7679 @include c-arc.texi
7680 @end ifset
7681
7682 @ifset ARM
7683 @include c-arm.texi
7684 @end ifset
7685
7686 @ifset AVR
7687 @include c-avr.texi
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @ifset Blackfin
7691 @include c-bfin.texi
7692 @end ifset
7693
7694 @ifset CR16
7695 @include c-cr16.texi
7696 @end ifset
7697
7698 @ifset CRIS
7699 @include c-cris.texi
7700 @end ifset
7701
7702 @ifset Renesas-all
7703 @ifclear GENERIC
7704 @node Machine Dependencies
7705 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7706
7707 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7708 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7709 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7710 family.
7711
7712 @menu
7713 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7714 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7715 @end menu
7716 @lowersections
7717 @end ifclear
7718 @end ifset
7719
7720 @ifset D10V
7721 @include c-d10v.texi
7722 @end ifset
7723
7724 @ifset D30V
7725 @include c-d30v.texi
7726 @end ifset
7727
7728 @ifset EPIPHANY
7729 @include c-epiphany.texi
7730 @end ifset
7731
7732 @ifset H8/300
7733 @include c-h8300.texi
7734 @end ifset
7735
7736 @ifset HPPA
7737 @include c-hppa.texi
7738 @end ifset
7739
7740 @ifset I370
7741 @include c-i370.texi
7742 @end ifset
7743
7744 @ifset I80386
7745 @include c-i386.texi
7746 @end ifset
7747
7748 @ifset I860
7749 @include c-i860.texi
7750 @end ifset
7751
7752 @ifset I960
7753 @include c-i960.texi
7754 @end ifset
7755
7756 @ifset IA64
7757 @include c-ia64.texi
7758 @end ifset
7759
7760 @ifset IP2K
7761 @include c-ip2k.texi
7762 @end ifset
7763
7764 @ifset LM32
7765 @include c-lm32.texi
7766 @end ifset
7767
7768 @ifset M32C
7769 @include c-m32c.texi
7770 @end ifset
7771
7772 @ifset M32R
7773 @include c-m32r.texi
7774 @end ifset
7775
7776 @ifset M680X0
7777 @include c-m68k.texi
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @ifset M68HC11
7781 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7782 @end ifset
7783
7784 @ifset METAG
7785 @include c-metag.texi
7786 @end ifset
7787
7788 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7789 @include c-microblaze.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset MIPS
7793 @include c-mips.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset MMIX
7797 @include c-mmix.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset MSP430
7801 @include c-msp430.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset NDS32
7805 @include c-nds32.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset NIOSII
7809 @include c-nios2.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset NS32K
7813 @include c-ns32k.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset PDP11
7817 @include c-pdp11.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset PJ
7821 @include c-pj.texi
7822 @end ifset
7823
7824 @ifset PPC
7825 @include c-ppc.texi
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset RL78
7829 @include c-rl78.texi
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 @ifset RISCV
7833 @include c-riscv.texi
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset RX
7837 @include c-rx.texi
7838 @end ifset
7839
7840 @ifset S390
7841 @include c-s390.texi
7842 @end ifset
7843
7844 @ifset SCORE
7845 @include c-score.texi
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset SH
7849 @include c-sh.texi
7850 @include c-sh64.texi
7851 @end ifset
7852
7853 @ifset SPARC
7854 @include c-sparc.texi
7855 @end ifset
7856
7857 @ifset TIC54X
7858 @include c-tic54x.texi
7859 @end ifset
7860
7861 @ifset TIC6X
7862 @include c-tic6x.texi
7863 @end ifset
7864
7865 @ifset TILEGX
7866 @include c-tilegx.texi
7867 @end ifset
7868
7869 @ifset TILEPRO
7870 @include c-tilepro.texi
7871 @end ifset
7872
7873 @ifset V850
7874 @include c-v850.texi
7875 @end ifset
7876
7877 @ifset VAX
7878 @include c-vax.texi
7879 @end ifset
7880
7881 @ifset VISIUM
7882 @include c-visium.texi
7883 @end ifset
7884
7885 @ifset XGATE
7886 @include c-xgate.texi
7887 @end ifset
7888
7889 @ifset XSTORMY16
7890 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7891 @end ifset
7892
7893 @ifset XTENSA
7894 @include c-xtensa.texi
7895 @end ifset
7896
7897 @ifset Z80
7898 @include c-z80.texi
7899 @end ifset
7900
7901 @ifset Z8000
7902 @include c-z8k.texi
7903 @end ifset
7904
7905 @ifset GENERIC
7906 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7907 @raisesections
7908 @end ifset
7909
7910 @node Reporting Bugs
7911 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7912 @cindex bugs in assembler
7913 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7914
7915 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7916
7917 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7918 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7919 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7920 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7921
7922 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7923 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7924
7925 @menu
7926 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7927 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7928 @end menu
7929
7930 @node Bug Criteria
7931 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7932 @cindex bug criteria
7933
7934 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7935
7936 @itemize @bullet
7937 @cindex fatal signal
7938 @cindex assembler crash
7939 @cindex crash of assembler
7940 @item
7941 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7942 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7943
7944 @cindex error on valid input
7945 @item
7946 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7947
7948 @cindex invalid input
7949 @item
7950 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7951 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7952 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7953
7954 @item
7955 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7956 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7957 @end itemize
7958
7959 @node Bug Reporting
7960 @section How to Report Bugs
7961 @cindex bug reports
7962 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7963
7964 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7965 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7966 contact that organization first.
7967
7968 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7969 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7970 distribution.
7971
7972 @ifset BUGURL
7973 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7974 to @value{BUGURL}.
7975 @end ifset
7976
7977 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7978 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7979 fact or leave it out, state it!
7980
7981 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7982 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7983 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7984 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7985 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7986 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7987 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7988 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7989 and the most helpful.
7990
7991 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7992 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7993 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7994
7995 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7996 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7997 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7998 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7999
8000 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8001
8002 @itemize @bullet
8003 @item
8004 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8005 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8006
8007 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8008 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8009
8010 @item
8011 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8012
8013 @item
8014 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8015 version number.
8016
8017 @item
8018 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8019 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8020
8021 @item
8022 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8023 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8024 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8025
8026 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8027 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8028
8029 @item
8030 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8031 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8032 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8033 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8034 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8035 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8036 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8037
8038 @item
8039 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8040 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8041
8042 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8043 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8044 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8045 make a mistake.
8046
8047 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8048 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8049 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8050 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8051 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8052 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8053 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8054 observations.
8055
8056 @item
8057 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8058 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8059 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8060 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8061 by line number.
8062
8063 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8064 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8065 @end itemize
8066
8067 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8068
8069 @itemize @bullet
8070 @item
8071 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8072
8073 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8074 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8075 changes will not affect it.
8076
8077 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8078 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8079 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8080 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8081
8082 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8083 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8084 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8085 less time, and so on.
8086
8087 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8088 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8089
8090 @item
8091 A patch for the bug.
8092
8093 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8094 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8095 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8096 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8097
8098 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8099 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8100 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8101 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8102
8103 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8104 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8105 help us to understand.
8106
8107 @item
8108 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8109
8110 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8111 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8112 @end itemize
8113
8114 @node Acknowledgements
8115 @chapter Acknowledgements
8116
8117 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8118 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8119 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8120 @c (October 2012),
8121 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8122
8123 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8124 more details?}
8125
8126 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8127 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8128 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8129
8130 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8131 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8132 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8133 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8134 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8135 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8136 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8137 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8138 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8139 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8140
8141 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8142 in format-specific I/O modules.
8143
8144 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8145 has done much work with it since.
8146
8147 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8148
8149 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8150
8151 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8152 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8153
8154 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8155 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8156 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8157 support a.out format.
8158
8159 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8160 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8161 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8162 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8163 targets.
8164
8165 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8166 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8167 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8168 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8169 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8170 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8171 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8172
8173 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8174 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8175 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8176 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8177
8178 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8179
8180 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8181
8182 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8183 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8184 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8185 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8186
8187 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8188 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8189 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8190 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8191 and some initial 64-bit support).
8192
8193 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8194
8195 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8196 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8197
8198 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8199 flavors.
8200
8201 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8202 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8203
8204 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8205 configuration enhancements.
8206
8207 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8208
8209 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8210 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8211 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8212 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8213
8214 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8215 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8216 @include fdl.texi
8217
8218 @node AS Index
8219 @unnumbered AS Index
8220
8221 @printindex cp
8222
8223 @bye
8224 @c Local Variables:
8225 @c fill-column: 79
8226 @c End:
This page took 0.199968 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.